IPS-G-SF-355(1)
FOREWORD
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the
views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum and are
intended for use in the oil and gas production
facilities,
oil
refineries,
chemical
and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing
installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable
standards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are
also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience
acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
the local market availability. The options which
are not specified in the text of the standards are
itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select
his appropriate preferences therein.
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be
sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt
these standards to their requirements. However,
they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS
Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user.
This addendum together with the relevant IPS
shall form the job specification for the specific
project or work.
The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately
every five years. Each standards are subject to
amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the
latest edition of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send
their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the
following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant
technical committee and in case of approval will
be incorporated in the next revision of the
standard.
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎر‬
‫( ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﺪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬IPS) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻔﺖ‬
،‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬،‫ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬،‫و ﮔﺎز‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﻓﺮاورش ﮔﺎز و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﺪهﻫﺎﺋﻲ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻧﻔﺖ ﻛﺸﻮر و‬.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاردي‬،‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻻ از ﺑﺎزار داﺧﻠﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﻲ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ آورده ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺪوﻳﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪيﻫﺎي ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص‬.‫ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪ‬.‫آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ آن ﭘﺮوژه و ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﺎص را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داد‬
Standards and Research department
‫ ﻛﻮﭼﻪ‬،‫ ﺧﺮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬،‫ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻛﺮﻳﻤﺨﺎن زﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻬﺮان‬،‫اﻳﺮان‬
19 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ﭼﻬﺎردﻫﻢ‬
‫اداره ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎت و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ‬
1585886851 : ‫ﻛﺪﭘﺴﺘﻲ‬
66153055 ‫ و‬88810459 - 60 : ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
88810462 : ‫دور ﻧﮕﺎر‬
:‫ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻚ‬
Standards@nioc.org
No.19, Street14, North kheradmand
Karimkhan Avenue, Tehran, Iran .
Postal Code- 1585886851
Tel: 88810459-60 & 66153055
Fax: 88810462
Email: Standards@nioc.org
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و روزآﻣﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردي ﺣﺬف و ﻳﺎ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﺑﻪ آن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎ و‬،‫از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات اﺻﻼﺣﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد‬
‫ ﻧﻈﺮات و‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ زﻳﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎص ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮدهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات درﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ در ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و در‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ در ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
GENERAL DEFINITIONS:
Throughout this Standard
definitions shall apply.
: ‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
the
following
.‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬
COMPANY :
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated
companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
such as National Iranian Oil Company, National
Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical
Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And
Distribution Company.
: ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
PURCHASER :
Means the “Company" where this standard is a
part of direct purchaser order by the “Company”,
and the “Contractor” where this Standard is a part
of contract documents.
VENDOR AND SUPPLIER:
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or
fabricate the equipment or material.
CONTRACTOR:
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose
tender has been accepted by the company.
EXECUTOR :
Executor is the party which carries out all or part of
construction and/or commissioning for the project.
INSPECTOR :
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a
person/persons or a body appointed in writing by
the company for the inspection of fabrication and
installation work
SHALL:
Is used where a provision is mandatory.
SHOULD:
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
WILL:
Is normally used in connection with the action by
the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
supplier or vendor.
MAY:
Is used where
discretionary.
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﮔﺎز اﻳﺮان‬،‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺘﻲ اﻃﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ آن ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﻗﺮارداد آن اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه و ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم ﺻﻨﻌﺖ را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎر‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدش‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺼﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
: ‫ﻣﺠﺮي‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮي ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ اﻃﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ و ﻳﺎ راه اﻧﺪازي ﭘﺮوژه را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎزرس‬
‫ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪاي اﻃﻼق‬/‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎزرس ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
: ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
a
provision
is
completely
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
GENERAL STANDARD
FOR
SAFETY PORTABLE LADDERS
FIRST REVISION
NOVEMBER 2009
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اول‬
1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of
Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither
whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any
third party, reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﻘﻮق آن ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ آن ﺑﻮده و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
،‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬،‫ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ازﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬،‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻳﺎ روش دﻳﮕﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻓﺮاد ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
CONTENTS:
Page
No.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
:‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
0. INTRODUCTION ............................................. 6
6 ............................................................. ‫ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬-0
1. SCOPE................................................................ 7
7 ............................................................... ‫ داﻣﻨﻪ‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 7
7 ............................................................. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY......... 9
9 ............................................... ‫ ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-3
3.1 Extending Ladder........................................ 9
9 ............................................ ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬1-3
3.2 Folding Trestles ........................................... 9
9 .............................‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دوﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬2-3
3.3 Ladder Backed Steps .................................. 9
9 ...................... ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار‬3-3
3.4 Leaning Ladder ........................................... 9
9 .............................................. ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ‬4-3
3.5 Lightweight Stagings................................... 9
9 ..................................... ‫ دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ‬5-3
3.6 Shelf Ladder ................................................ 9
9 ................................. ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬6-3
3.7 Single-Section Ladder................................. 9
9 .......................................... ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬7-3
3.8 Spacing (of Rungs, Treads or
Cross-Bearers) ............................................. 9
‫ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ر‬‫و‬‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري )ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬8-3
9 ......................................... (‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
3.9 Standing Step Ladder ................................. 9
9 .................................... ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭘﻠﻪ دار اﻳﺴﺘﺎ‬9-3
3.10 Stiles............................................................ 10
10 ......................................... ‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬10-3
3.11 Swing Back Steps....................................... 10
10 ............................................ ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ‬11-3
3.12 Wood Characteristics................................ 10
10 ........................................ ‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭼﻮب‬12-3
3.13 Wood Irregularities................................... 10
10 ....................................‫ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﻈﻤﻲ ﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب‬13-3
4. UNITS................................................................. 11
11 ........................................................... ‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-4
5. TYPES AND CLASSES ................................... 11
11 ........................................ ‫ اﻧﻮاع و ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ‬-5
5.1 Types ............................................................ 11
11 ......................................................... ‫ اﻧﻮاع‬1-5
1
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫‪5.2 Classes .......................................................... 12‬‬
‫‪ 2-5‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ ‪12 ............................................‬‬
‫‪6. MATERIALS (INDUSTRIAL) ........................ 12‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻮاد )ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ(‪12 ...................................................‬‬
‫‪6.1 Aluminum Ladders ..................................... 12‬‬
‫‪ 1-6‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪12 ...................................‬‬
‫‪6.2 Wood Ladders ............................................. 14‬‬
‫‪ 2-6‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ‪14 ..........................................‬‬
‫‪7. SPECIFIC TYPES............................................. 21‬‬
‫‪ -7‬اﻧﻮاع ﺧﺎص‪21 .......................................................‬‬
‫‪7.1 Single Section and Extending (Aluminum) 22‬‬
‫‪ 1-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ‪22 ...........‬‬
‫‪7.2 Single Section and Extending Sections‬‬
‫‪(Wood-Class I).............................................. 24‬‬
‫‪ 2-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫)ﭼﻮﺑﻲ – ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ‪24 .......................................... (1‬‬
‫‪7.3 Shelf Ladders (Aluminum)......................... 31‬‬
‫‪ 3-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ‪31 ..........‬‬
‫‪7.4 Shelf Ladders (Wood Class 1) .................... 32‬‬
‫‪ 4-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪32 (1‬‬
‫‪7.5 Swing Back Steps (Aluminum) .................. 33‬‬
‫‪ 5-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ‪33 ......................‬‬
‫‪7.6 Swing Back Steps (Wood)........................... 35‬‬
‫‪ 6-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ)ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ‪35 ...............................‬‬
‫‪7.7 Backed Steps (Aluminum) .......................... 38‬‬
‫‪ 7-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ‪38 ...‬‬
‫‪7.8 Wood Type Backed Steps Class 1 .............. 39‬‬
‫‪ 8-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪39 ............................................. (1‬‬
‫‪7.9 Folding Trestles (Aluminum) ..................... 40‬‬
‫‪ 9-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دوﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ‪40 ...............‬‬
‫‪7.10 Wood Type Folding Trestles (Class (1)).. 41‬‬
‫‪ 10-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪41 ........................................... (1‬‬
‫‪7.11 Aluminum Type Lightweight Stagings.... 43‬‬
‫‪ 11-7‬دارﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻧﻮع آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪43 ......‬‬
‫‪7.12 Wood Type Lightweight Stagings Class 1.. 44‬‬
‫‪ 12-7‬دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺒﻚ‪،‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪44 .............................................(1‬‬
‫‪8. PERFORMANCE TESTS ................................ 49‬‬
‫‪ -8‬آزﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪49 ..............................................‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
8.1 Performance Test for Aluminum Type of
Single-Section Standing and Extending
Ladders ......................................................... 49
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي‬1-8
49 .............................. .‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ اﻳﺴﺘﺎ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
8.2 Performance Test of Aluminum Type
Shelf Ladders............................................... 50
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬2-8
50 ........................................... ‫ﻧﻮع آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
8.3 Performance Test of Aluminum Swing
Back Steps..................................................... 51
51 .... ‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬3-8
8.4 Performance Test of Aluminum Ladder
Backed Steps ................................................. 54
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ‬4-8
54 .......................................... ‫دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار‬
8.5 Performance Test of Aluminum Type
Folding Trestles ............................................. 54
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬5-8
54 ..................................................‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ‬
9. TOLERANCES ON SIZES .............................. 54
54 .......................................... ‫ رواداري در اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎ‬-9
10. MARKINGS..................................................... 55
55 ................................................... ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬-10
11. CARE AND USE OF LADDERS................... 56
56 ............................... ‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬-11
11.1 Handling..................................................... 56
56 ....................................................‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬1-11
11.2 Storage........................................................ 56
56 ................................................. ‫ اﻧﺒﺎرﻛﺮدن‬2-11
11.3 Transport ................................................... 56
56 ............................................... ‫ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬3-11
11.4 Maintenance .............................................. 56
56 .................................... ‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬4-11
11.5 Inspection................................................... 57
57 .................................................... ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬5-11
11.6 Painting ...................................................... 57
57 ............................................... ‫ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي‬6-11
11.7 Electrical Hazards..................................... 57
57 ............................................. ‫ ﺧﻄﺮات ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬7-11
11.8 Inspection................................................... 57
57 .................................................... ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬8-11
11.9 Angle of Ladder......................................... 57
57 .............................................. ‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬9-11
3
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
11.10 Support..................................................... 57
57 .................................................. ‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه‬10-11
11.11 Fixing of the Ladder................................ 58
58 ......................................‫ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬11-11
11.12 Overlap..................................................... 58
58 ............................................... ‫ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ‬12-11
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A DETERMINATION OF SLOPE
OF GRAIN ................................... 59
59 ...................... ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﺷﻴﺐ رﮔﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX B TEST FOR DEFLECTION OF
LADDERS AND STEP FRONTS
63
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب آزﻣﻮن اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
63 .........................................‫ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
APPENDIX C STRENGTH TEST FOR
LADDERS, STEP FRONTS AND
TRESTLE FRAMES.................... 64
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج آزﻣﻮن اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
64 ............... ‫ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
APPENDIX D LADDER TWIST TEST ............. 65
65 ......................... ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ د آزﻣﻮن ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
APPENDIX E SIDEWAYS BENDING (SWAY)
TEST FOR LADDERS, STEP
FRONTS AND TRESTLE
FRAMES ...................................... 67
‫ ﻗﺎب ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬،‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫ آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﺟﻮاﻧﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
67 ............. ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ و ﭼﺎرﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
APPENDIX F CANTILEVER BENDING
(HORN END STRENGTH) TEST
FOR LADDERS, STEP FRONTS
AND TRESTLE FRAMES ......... 69
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ و آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد )اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دﻣﺎﻏﻪ( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭘﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و‬
69 ........................................ ‫دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
APPENDIX G TEST FOR RUNGS..................... 72
72 .................................. ‫ور‬‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ز آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
APPENDIX H TEST FOR TREADS OF
SHELF LADDERS ..................... 73
73 .... ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ح آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬
APPENDIX I TESTS FOR STEPS...................... 74
74 ........................................... ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ط آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX J TEST FOR TRESTLES ............... 77
77 ..................... ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ي آزﻣﻮن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دوﻟﻨﮕﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
4
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX K TEST FOR LIGHTWEIGHT
STAGINGS .................................. 78
78 .............. ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ك آزﻣﻮن دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ‬
APPENDIX L TEST FOR EXTENSION LADDER
GUIDE BRACKETS .................... 79
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ل آزﻣﻮن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
79 .................................................. ‫ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
APPENDIX M SPECIFIC TYPES OF
LADDERS ..................................... 81
81 ..................................‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺧﺎص‬
5
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬-0
0. INTRODUCTION
،‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ‬،‫ آزﻣﻮن‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ و ﭼﻮﺑﻲ را ﺑﻪ‬
،‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺣﺼﻮل اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﺎدي ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
،‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﺣﻮادﺛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺳﻘﻮط از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲاﻓﺘﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ آن ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺻﺤﻴﺢ از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
،‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻮدن اﻳﻤﻦ‬،11 ‫ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬.‫ اﺳﺖ‬،‫وﻳﮋه ﺑﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ اﺧﺘﺼﺎر ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬،‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
،‫ و ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ دارد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬،‫داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻳﻦ راﻫﻜﺎرﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
This Standard prescribes the minimum
requirements for the construction, testing, care
and use of the industrial types of portable
aluminum and wood ladders in order to ensure
safety under normal conditions of usage.
Accidents caused by falls from ladders have a
high rate of frequency and many of them have
occurred from misuse especially overloading. In
clause 11, safe handling, storage, transport,
maintenance and inspections are briefly
discussed and it is emphasized that these guide
lines to be thoroughly observed when ladders
are handled.
For timber ladders risks associated for different
types of test to pass are too great, therefore, it is
strongly recommended that these tests which
will harm the structure of the ladder being left
and dealt with by the manufacturers.
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮات ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم اﻧﻮاع آزﻣﻮن ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن واﮔﺬار ﺷﻮد‬
This Standard does not apply to ladders for
special professional use such as fire brigade
ladders or mobile ladders which require
mechanical aids for erection.
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻏﻞ ﺧﺎص ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ آﺗﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﭘﺎداﺷﺘﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲرود‬،‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
6
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ اﺑﻌﺎد‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت را ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﻮاﻋﺪي را‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ و ﭼﻮﺑﻲ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ آزﻣﻮن و ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻋﺎدي‬
This Standard specifies the minimum
requirements for the materials, dimensions and
workmanship for aluminum and timber ladders.
It also prescribes rules for construction, testing
and care of ladders under normal conditions of
usage.
:1 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 1:
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬1381 ‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﻣﺮداد ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
1 ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﻣﻮارد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺻﻼﺣﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ اﺑﻼغ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‬178 ‫ﻃﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
This standard specification is reviewed and
updated by the relevant technical committee on
Agu 2002, as amendment No. 1 by circular No.
178.
:2 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 2:
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد دو زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺎزﻧﮕﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم و ﺑﻪ‬1388 ‫در آﺑﺎن ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫( اﻳﻦ‬0) ‫ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬.‫( اراﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬1) ‫ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﺴﻮخ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This bilingual standard is a revised version of
the standard specification by the relevant
technical committee on November 2009, which
is issued as revision (1). Revision (0) of the
said standard specification is withdrawn.
:3 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 3:
‫ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ و اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻼك ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
In case of conflict between Farsi and English
languages, English language shall govern.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ و آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪي ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ در آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫ در‬.‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
.‫اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻬﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this Standard the following dated
and undated standards/codes are referred to.
These referenced documents shall, to the extent
specified herein, form a part of this standard.
For dated references, the edition cited applies.
The applicability of changes in dated references
that occur after the cited date shall be mutually
agreed upon by the Company and the Vendor.
For undated references, the latest edition of the
referenced
documents
(including
any
supplements and amendments) applies.
(‫ )ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬BSI
BSI (BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION)
BS 1129
"Portable Timber Ladders
Strips Trestles and Lightweight
Stagings"
‫" ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
"‫ودارﺑﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ‬
BS 1203
"Specification for Synthetic
Resin Adhesives (Phenolic and
Aminoplastic) for Plywood"
BS EN 301
"Adhesives, Phenolic and Amino
Plastic, for Load-Bearing Timber
Structures: Classification and
Performance Requirements"
‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎي رزﻳﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
BS 1203
‫)ﻓﻨﻮﻟﻴﻚ و آﻣﻴﻨﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ( ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي‬
"‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪاي‬
‫ "ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎي‬BS EN 301
‫رزﻳﻨﻲ ﻓﻨﻮﻟﻲ و آﻣﻴﻨﻮ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاي‬
" ‫ﭼﺎرﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎرﺑﺮ‬
7
BS 1129
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
BS 1210
"Specification
Screws"
Wood
"‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
BS 1210
BS 1449
"Specification for Carbon and
Carbon-Manganese
Plate,
Sheet and Strip"
‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ و ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ و‬
"‫ ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ‬-‫ﻣﻨﮕﻨﺰ‬
BS 1449
BS 1470
"Wrought Aluminum and
Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering
Purposes-Plate,
Sheet and Strip"
‫"آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه و آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬
‫ ورق‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
"‫و ﻧﻮار‬
BS 1470
BS 1471
"Wrought
Aluminum
and
Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering
Purposes-Drawn
Tube"
‫"آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎرﺷﺪه و آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ – ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻲ درز‬
"‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
BS 1471
BS 1472
"Wrought Aluminum and
Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes-Forging
Stock and Forging"
‫"آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم و آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ – ﭘﺘﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
"‫ﻣﻮاد اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﭘﺘﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
BS 1472
BS 1474
"Wrought
Aluminum
and
Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering
Purposes-Bars,
Extruded Round Tubes and
Sections"
‫"آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم و آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ – ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
"‫ﮔﺮد و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻛﺴﺘﺮود ﺷﺪه‬
BS 1474
BS 1490
"Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloy Ingots and Castings"
‫"رﻳﺨﺘﻪﮔﺮي و ﺷﻤﺶﻫﺎي آﻟﻴﺎژ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم و‬
"‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬
BS 1490
BS 4300
"Specification Supplementary
Series) for Wrought Aluminum
and Aluminum Alloys for
General Engineering Purposes"
‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت )ﺳﺮﻳﻬﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ( آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم و آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف‬
"‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
BS 4300
for
‫ "ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺤﺮاف و اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎ در اﻟﻮارﻫﺎي‬BS EN 1313
" ‫اره و ﮔﺮد ﺷﺪه‬
BS EN 1313 "Round and Sawn TimberPermitted Deviation and Sizes"
Part 1:
Softwood Sawn Timber”
BS 6125
“Specification for Natural Fiber
Cords, Lines and Twines”
:‫ﺑﺨﺶ اول‬
،‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت رﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻃﻨﺎبﻫﺎ‬
"‫رﻳﺴﻤﺎن ﭼﻨﺪﻻ و ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
BS 6125
"‫ "ﭼﺪن ﭼﻜﺶ ﺧﻮار‬BS EN 1562
BS EN 1562 "Founding – Malleable Cast
Iron"
BS 754-7
‫اﻟﻮار ﭼﻮﺑﻲ رﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
‫"ﻣﻴﻠﻪ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ و آﻟﻴﺎژ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان رواداري‬،‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺪون درز‬7 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
"‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد و ﺷﻜﻞ‬
“Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys-Cold Drawn Rod/Bar
and Tube – Part 7: Seamless
Tubes,
Tolerances
on
Dimensions and Form”
BS 754-7
(‫ )اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
"‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬IPS-E-GN-100
IPS-E-GN-100 "Engineering Standard for
Units"
8
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-3
3. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
. ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
For the purpose of this Standard the following
definitions shall apply.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬1-3
3.1 Extending Ladder
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد از دو ﻳــﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎع آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺰاﻧﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ و ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﭘﻠﻪ‬
A leaning ladder consisting of two or three
sections constructed so that the height can be
varied, in increments of one rung spacing, by
sliding the sections relative to each other.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دوﻟﻨﮕﻪاي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬2-3
3.2 Folding Trestles
‫ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬،‫دوﻗﺎب ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري را ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
(«‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ »ﻫ« ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ »م‬
An arrangement of two frames hinged together,
each fitted with cross-bearers suitable for
supporting a working platform (see Appendix M
Fig. e).
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار‬3-3
3.3 Ladder Backed Steps
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭘﻠﻪدار اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎب ﻋﻘﺒﻲ آن ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻳﻚ ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري‬
(«‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ »د« ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ »م‬
A standing step ladder in which the back is
fitted with cross-bearers suitable for supporting
a working platform. [See Appendix M (d)]
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ‬4-3
3.4 Leaning Ladder
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ داده‬
.‫ ﻣﺜﻞ دﻳﻮار‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
A ladder supported in use by a separate
structure, e.g. a wall.
‫ دارﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ‬5-3
3.5 Lightweight Stagings
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻛﻒ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻬﻦ و ﺻﺎف را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
A working platform constructed of stiles, crossbearers and decking, to provide a flat working
surface.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬6-3
3.6 Shelf Ladder
‫ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ‬،‫ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻓﻘﻲ دارﻧﺪ‬
A single-section ladder fitted with treads which
are intended to be horizontal in use.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬7-3
3.7 Single-Section Ladder
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻚ واﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
A leaning ladder constructed and used as a
single unit.
3.8 Spacing (of Rungs, Treads or CrossBearers)
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ر‬‫و‬‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬاري )ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
8-3
The distance, measured along the longitudinal
axis of the stiles, between the same relative
positions of the members.
‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺤﻮر ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
.‫در ﻳﻚ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭘﻠﻪدار اﻳﺴﺘﺎ‬9-3
3.9 Standing Step Ladder
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ از دو ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ و ﻋﻘﺒﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ و ﺗﺎﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
A self supporting ladder consisting of a front
and back hinged together and capable of being
folded, the ascendable front being in the form of
a shelf ladder.
9
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬10-3
3.10 Stiles
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬،‫ور‬‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
.‫و ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The side members to which the rungs, treads or
cross-bearers are fitted.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ‬11-3
3.11 Swing Back Steps
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي آن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﻬﻦ و‬
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﺎب ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
A standing step ladder in which the top is in the
form of a tread and the back is merely a
supporting frame.
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭼﻮب‬12-3
3.12 Wood Characteristics
‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬،‫ اﻧﺪازه و ﺗﻌﺪاد آﻧﻬﺎ‬،‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬
.‫ﭼﻮب را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
Distinguishing features, the extent and number
of which determine the quality of a piece of
wood.
‫ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﻈﻤﻲﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب‬13-3
3.13 Wood Irregularities
،‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬،‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ در داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ روي ﭼﻮب‬
.‫دوام و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آن را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﺪ‬
Natural characteristics in or on the wood that
may lower its durability, strength, or utility.
‫ ﺣﻔﺮهﻫﺎي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬1-13-3
3.13.1 Bark pocket
‫ﺣﻔﺮهاي ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ درﺧﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻴﺎه روي ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ور در ﺳﻄﻮح ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺎري ﻃﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬‫ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
An opening between annual growth rings that
contains bark. Bark pockets appear as dark
streaks on radial surfaces and as rounded areas
on tangential surfaces.
‫ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲ‬2-13-3
3.13.2 Check
‫ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲ ﭼﻮب در راﺳﺘﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ اﻟﻴﺎف ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر وارده ﺑﻪ ﭼﻮب‬،‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ ﭼﻮب ﺑﻮده‬
.‫ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫در ﻃﻮل ﻓﺼﻮل ﺳﺎل‬
A separation of the wood along the fiber
direction that usually extends across the rings of
annual growth, commonly resulting from
stresses set up in the wood during seasoning.
‫ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻲ‬3-13-3
3.13.3 Compression failure
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ )ﻛﺠﻲ( اﻟﻴﺎف ﺑــﻪ واﺳﻄﻪ ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ در‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻃﻮل رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب اﺳﺖ‬
‫ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬.‫ﺻﻮرت ﭼﻴﻦ و ﭼﺮوك در ﻃﻮل ﺳﻄﺢ ﭼﻮب ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در‬.‫ﻣﻮارد اﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺎ »ﺑﺮش اﻟﻴﺎف« در ﺳﻄﻮح رﮔﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
A deformation (buckling) of the fibers due to
excessive compression along the grain. This
deformation may appear as a wrinkle across the
surface. In some cases, compression failures
may be present but not visible as wrinkles; in
such cases they are often indicated by “fiber
breakage” on end grain surfaces.
‫ ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻲ ﭼﻮب‬4-13-3
3.13.4 Compression wood
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل و ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻛﻪ در ﮔﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﺮم اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ‬
An aberrant (abnormal) and highly variable type
of wood structure occurring in softwood
species.
‫ رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرب‬5-13-3
3.13.5 Cross grain (slope of grain)
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺟﻬﺖ رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب از ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮازي ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻮاﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﻮده و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ارﻳﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎرﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻫﺮدو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
A deviation of the fiber direction from a line
parallel to the sides of the piece. Cross grain
may be diagonal or spiral, or both.
10
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻓﺴﺎد‬6-13-3
3.13.6 Decay
‫ﻓﺴﺎد ﭼﻮب ﺑﻪ واﺳﻄﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻗﺎرچﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺮب ﭼﻮب اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻟﻜﻪ و ﭘﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The disintegration of wood due to the action of
wood-destroying fungi; also known as dot and rot.
‫ ﮔِﺮِه ﭼﻮب‬7-13-3
3.13.7 Knot
A portion of a branch or limb, embedded in the
tree and cut through in the process of lumber
manufacture. It is classified according to size,
quality, occurrence, and location in the cross
section of a piece. The size of the knot is
determined by its average diameter on the
surface of the piece.
‫ﺗﻜﻪاي از ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺸﻌﺎب در درﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮﻳﺪن اﻟﻮار‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﮔِﺮِهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬.‫ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬،‫از وﺳﻂ‬
‫ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪن و ﻣﻜﺎن در ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﭼﻮب‬،‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬،‫اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﮔِﺮِه ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ آن روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﭼﻮب ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
3.13.8 Low-density wood
‫ ﭼﻮب ﺳﺒﻚ‬8-13-3
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺎً از ﻧﻈﺮ وزن ﺳﺒﻚ و ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﻟﺤﺎظ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬
‫ در ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﻧﺮم و ﺳﺒﻚ‬.‫ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ اﺳﺖ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﻮب‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺎً ﭘﻬﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً داراي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ از ﭼﻮب ﻫﺎي‬
‫ از ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﭼﻮب ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬.‫( اﺳﺖ‬LATEWOOD )‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ور ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ‬‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ در ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﺧﻠﻞ و ﻓﺮج ﻣﺪ‬،‫ﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬
.‫در آن ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
Wood that is exceptionally light in weight and
usually deficient in strength properties for the
species. In softwood species, low density is
frequently indicated by exceptionally wide, or
some times by extremely narrow, rings and
generally has a low proportion of latewood. On
the other hand, low density hardwood, at least in
ring-porous species, is most commonly
indicated by excessively narrow annual rings in
which the earlywood portion predominates.
(‫ ﺣﻔﺮه ﺣﺎوي ﻋﺼﺎره ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺎك )ﺻﻤﻎ‬9-13-3
3.13.9 Pitch pocket
‫ﺣﻔﺮه ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ درﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي‬
.‫ﻋﺼﺎره ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺎك ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ اﺳﺖ‬
An opening extending parallel to the annual
growth rings that contains, or that has contained,
either solid or liquid pitch.
‫ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻃﻮل رﮔﻪ ﭼﻮب‬10-13-3
3.13.10 Shake
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻃﻮل رﮔﻪ ﭼﻮب اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫــﺎي رﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ رخ‬
.‫ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
A separation along the grain, occurring most
often between the rings of annual growth.
‫ ﺷﻜﺎف‬11-13-3
3.13.11 Split
‫ﺷﻜﺎف ﭼﻮب ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻣﺴﻴﺮ اﻟﻴﺎف ﺑﻪ واﺳﻄﻪ ﭘﺎرﮔﻲ اﻟﻴﺎف ﭼﻮب‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑــﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﻴﺮوﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲاﻓﺘﺪ‬
A separation of the wood parallel to the fiber
direction due to tearing apart of the wood fibers,
normally caused by external forces.
‫ زاﺋﺪه‬12-13-3
3.13.12 Wane
.‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ درﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ زاﺋﺪه ﭼﻮب در ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
Bark, or lack of wood, on the corner of a piece.
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-4
4. UNITS
‫ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard is based on International System
of Units (SI) as per IPS-E-GN-100, except
where otherwise is specified.
‫ اﻧﻮاع و ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ‬-5
5. TYPES AND CLASSES
‫ اﻧﻮاع‬1-5
5.1 Types
:‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
In this Standard ladders fall into the following
categories:
11
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
a) Aluminum ladders;
‫ب ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
b) Wooden ladders;
‫ج( اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺧﺎص‬
c) Specific types of ladders.
‫ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ‬2-5
5.2 Classes
‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ و ﺗﻜﺮار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
:‫ در ﻛﻼسﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ‬
According to general condition and frequency of
use portable ladders are in three different classes
as given below:
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
Class 1: Industrial
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻓﻌﺎت ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً زﻳﺎد و در‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف‬،‫ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﺷﻮار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
For heavy duty where relatively high frequency
and onerous conditions of use, carriage and
storage occur. Suitable for industrial purposes.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺳﺒﻚ ﺗﺠﺎري‬:2 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
Class 2: Light Trades
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻪ دﻓﻌﺎت ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻛﻢ و در‬
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف‬،‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮب اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺗﺠﺎري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
For medium duty where relatively low
frequency and reasonably good conditions of
use, storage and carriage occur. Suitable for
light trades purposes.
‫ ﻣﺼﺎرف ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬:3 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
Class 3: Domestic
،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ و در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮب ﻛﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
For light duty where frequency of use is low and
good storage and carriage conditions occur.
Suitable for domestic and household purposes.
(‫ ﻣﻮاد )ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬-6
6. MATERIALS (INDUSTRIAL)
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬1-6
6.1 Aluminum Ladders
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-1-6
6.1.1 General
The materials from which the component parts
are made shall be in accordance with 6.1.2. to
6.1.6.
‫ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6-1-6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬2-1-6
6.1.2 Guide brackets and fixed and latching
hooks shall be made from the materials given in
either (a), (b) or (c) as follows:
‫ ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻫﺎدي و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬2-1-6
‫ )ب( ﻳﺎ )ج( در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه‬،(‫ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ )اﻟﻒ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
6-1-6 ‫اﻟﻒ( آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در‬
a) Aluminum alloys, as specified in 6.1.6;
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ب ( ﻓﻮﻻد ﻧﺮم‬
b) Mild steel;
BS EN 1562 ‫ج ( ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
c) Whiteheart malleable cast iron complying
with BS EN 1562.
‫ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬3-1-6
6.1.3 Hinges
‫ )ب( و )ج( در‬،(‫ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ )اﻟﻒ‬
:‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﻣﺪه‬6-1-6 ‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫اﻟﻒ( آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫اﺳﺖ؛‬
Hinges shall be made from the materials given
in either (a), (b) or (c) as follows:
a) aluminum alloys, as specified in 6.1.6;
12
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ب ( ﻓﻮﻻد ﭘﺘﻚ ﺧﻮره و ﻧﻮار ﻓﻮﻻدي؛‬
b) forged steel or steel strip;
.BS 1562 ‫ج ( ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم ﺳﻔﻴﺪ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
c) whiteheart malleable cast iron complying
with BS EN 1562.
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و ﺳﺮﭘﻮش اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬4-1-6
6.1.4 Feet of stiles and capping for upper ends
of stiles or ends of treads shall be made from the
materials given in either (a), (b), or (c) as
follows:
‫ )ب( و ﻳﺎ‬،(‫ ﻳﺎ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﺎي ﭘﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ در )اﻟﻒ‬،‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
:‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫)ج( ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه‬
‫اﻟﻒ( ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ زﻳﺮ(؛‬
a) plastics, (See note below);
‫ب( ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ زﻳﺮ(؛‬
b) rubber, (See note below);
.‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬2-2-6 ‫ج( ﭼﻮب ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
c) timber, as specified in 6.2.2.
‫ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ در‬5-1-6
6.1.5 Decking of lightweight stagings shall be
made from the materials given in either (a), (b)
or (c) as follows:
:‫ )ب( ﻳﺎ )ج( ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،(‫)اﻟﻒ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬6-1-6 ‫ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫اﻟﻒ( آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
a) aluminum alloys, as specified in 6.1.6;
‫اﺳﺖ؛‬
‫ب( ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ زﻳﺮ(؛‬
b) plastics, (See note below);
.‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬2-2-6 ‫ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ج ( ﭼﻮب‬
c) timber, as specified in 6.2.2.
‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺟﺰاء ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از )اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎ‬6-1-6
6.1.6 Other components shall be made from
aluminum alloys as given in (a) to (f) as
follows:
:‫)و( ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
a) Drawn tube: designation 6063 (HT9) and
6082 (HT30) of BS 1471, or equivalent;
‫ و‬6063 (HT9) ‫ ﺑـــﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬:‫اﻟﻒ( ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻴـﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
b) Extruded sections: designation 6063
(HE9), 6082 (HE30), 6063A, 1200 (E1C)
and 6061 (HE20) of BS 1474 or
equivalent;
‫ و‬6063 (HE9) ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬:‫ب ( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻛﺴﺘﺮود ﺷﺪه‬
c) Longitudinally welded tube: designation
5251 (NJ4) of BS 4300: Part 1 or
equivalent;
‫ از‬5251 (NJ4) ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬:‫ج( ﻟﻮﻟﻪ درز ﺟﻮش ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
d) Castings: LM6 and LM25 of BS 1490 or
equivalent;
‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬LM25 ‫ و‬LM6 :‫د( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت رﻳﺨﺘﻪﮔﺮي ﺷﺪه‬
e) Components formed from sheet and
strip: designation 1200 (S1C), 3103
(NS3), 5154A (NS5), 5251 (NS4) and
6082 (HS30) of BS 1470, or equivalent;
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬:‫ﻫـ( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺷﻜﻞ داده ﺷﺪه از ورق ﻧﻮار‬
f) Forgings: 6082 (HF30) of BS 1472, or
equivalent.
‫ از‬6082 (HF30) :(‫و( ﭼﻜﺶ ﻛﺎري )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜـﻞ دادن‬
g)
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﺑﻌﺎد و رواداري ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬:‫ز( اﺑﻌﺎد و رواداري‬
.‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن‬BS 1471 ‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬6082 (HT30)
6061 (HE20), 1200 (EIC),
:6082(HE30)
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن‬BS 1474 ‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬6063A
.‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن‬1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺶ‬BS 4300 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن‬BS 1490
5251 ‫ و‬5154A (NS5) ‫ و‬3103 (NS3) ‫ و‬1200 (SIC)
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل‬BS 1470 ‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬6082 (HS30) ‫( و‬NS4)
BS 1472.
Dimensions and tolerances: For
tolerance and dimension for aluminum
sheet and strip refer to BS EN 754-7.
. ‫ ﻧﻮار و ﺻﻔﺤﺎت آﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬BS EN 754-7
13
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﻣﻮاد ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ و ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﺮار‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ وﻳﮋه ﻧﻮر ﻣﺎوراء‬،‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻨﻔﺶ‬
Plastic materials and rubber should be selected
having regard to the stresses to which they may
be subjected and their resistance to environmental
deterioration, especially that due to ultraviolet
light.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬2-6
6.2 Wood Ladders
‫ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب‬1-2-6
6.2.1 Species of timber
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-1-2-6
6.2.1.1 General
The timber used shall be selected by the
manufacturer from the species given in (6.2.2.2)
to (6.2.3.7). All like components, e.g. stiles,
rungs, etc. in any single article shall be of the
same species of timber, as far as can be
achieved by visual examination.
(2-2-2-6) ‫ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه از ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪاي ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬،‫ ﺗﻤﺎم اﻧﻮاع اﺟﺰاء‬.‫( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬7-3-2-6) ‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫ از ﻧﻮع ﻫﻤﺎن‬،‫ور و ﻏﻴﺮه و ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ داد‬،‫ﭼﻮب‬
6.2.1.2 Stiles for builders pole ladders: Stiles
shall be made from European whitewood (picea
abies, Abies alba) or European redwood (Pinus
sylvestris), or equivalent.
:‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪاي ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬2-1-2-6
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي درﺧﺘﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻮه ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ اروﭘﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻨﻮﺑﺮ ﻧﺮوژي( ﻳﺎ ﭼﻮب درﺧﺘﻬﺎي ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻧﺮ و ﻣﺎده )ﻛﺎج‬
.‫اﺳﻜﺎﺗﻠﻨﺪي ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آﻧﻬﺎ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
6.2.1.3 Stiles for other ladders, trestles and
stagings: Stiles for other ladders shall be made
from European redwood, Douglas fir, imported
Sitka spruce, Eastern Canadian spruce,
Eurpoean whitewood, western hemlock or
hembal, or equivalent.
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﭼﻮب‬3-1-2-6
‫ ﭼﻮب ﺳﻔﻴﺪ اروﭘﺎﺋﻲ و ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺻﻨﻮﺑﺮ ﺷﺮق ﻛﺎﻧﺎدا‬،‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ اروﭘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻨﻮﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺎدل آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Laminated stiles shall be permitted provided
these are made from the above timbers and
glued with phenolic or resorcinol resin
adhesives to comply with the weather-proof and
boil-proof (WBP) resistance requirements of
BS EN 301.
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ روﻛﺶدار ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻪ از اﻧﻮاع ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﻓﻮق و ﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎي رزﻳﻨﻲ ﻓﻨﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ رﺳﻮرﺳﻴﻨﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬BS EN 301 - Part 1 ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ و ﺟﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
6.2.1.4 Rungs for builders’ pole ladders, singlesection and extending ladders. Rungs shall be
made from European oak, American white Oak,
European ash, American white ash, hornbeam,
yellow birch, hickory, robinia, keruing, pau
marfim, ramin, or equivalent.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﻢ‬4-1-2-6
6.2.1.5 Treads for shelf ladders and standing
step ladders
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫـﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻗﻔﺴﻪاي و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي‬5-1-2-6
Treads shall be made from any of the timbers
specified in (6.2.1.3) with the addition of Parana
pine, ramin and keruing.
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﺴﺎب‬3-1-2-6 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎج ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي راﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي‬،‫اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪاي و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻗﺎن‬،‫ ﻣﻤﺮز‬،‫ زﺑﺎن ﮔﻨﺠﺸﻚ‬،‫ ﺑﻠﻮط ﺳﻔﻴﺪ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫ﺑﻠﻮط اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ ﮔﺮدو و اﻧﻮاع ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫زرد‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪاي‬
and
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺮ دارﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ و ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ‬6-1-2-6
Cross-bearers shall be made from any of the
timbers specified in (6.2.1.3) and (6.2.1.4).
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﻧﻮاع ﭼﻮﺑﻬــﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬4-1-2-6 ‫ و‬3-1-2-6
6.2.1.6 Cross-Bearers
trestles
for
stagings
14
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻛﻒ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري دارﺑﺴﺖ‬7-1-2-6
6.2.1.7 Decking for stagings
‫ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري ﺑــﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬــﺎي ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﻨﺪﻫـــﺎي‬
‫ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ درﺟﻪ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬5-1-2-6 ‫ و‬3-1-2-6
‫ و آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاد‬WBP ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﺎدوام ﻳﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻤﺶ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺮوح ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ وزن ﻣﺮده دارﺑﺴﺖ از‬،‫ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز‬،‫وزن ﭼﻮب ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ آن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬
380 ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻣﻲ را وﻗﺘﻲ در ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ‬90 ‫ﻧﻜﻨﺪ و ﺗﻮان ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
.‫ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
Decking shall be made from any of the timbers
specified in (6.2.1.3) and (6.2.1.5). Plywood of
moderately durable rating or better with WBP
bending, aluminum or other man-made material
shall be permitted provided that the deadweight
of the staging does not exceed that for a wood
slatted staging and that the material used for
decking is capable of supporting a load of 90 kg
when supported at 380 mm centers.
‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﻮب‬2-2-6
6.2.2 Quality of timber
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-2-2-6
6.2.2.1 General
Sapwood shall be permitted in all species of
timber except oak. All timber shall be free from
apparent damage, fungal decay and insect
attack, except for an occasional ambrosia beetle
hole.
‫ ﭼﻮب ﺗﺎزه درﺧﺖ‬،‫در ﺗﻤﺎم اﻧﻮاع ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي ﭼﻮب ﺑﻠﻮط‬
‫ ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ‬،‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎرغ از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮي‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد‬،‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻗﺎرچ و ﺣﺸﺮات ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺳﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص‬
Kiln dried timber shall be free from caseshardening
and
honeycombing.
Pieces
abnormally light in weight shall be excluded, as
shall timber abnormally heavy; like components
shall be reasonably matched. Edges of sawn
faces shall be so finished that there is no rough
surface which might constitute a hazard for the
hands of the user.
‫ﭼﻮب ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﻮره ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎرغ از ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﺒﻚ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدي ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ‬.‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ و ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﺟﺰاء ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻮب ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدي‬
‫ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﻄﻮح اره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭼﻨﺎن ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻧﺸﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﺣﺸﺮه ﻓﻮق ﻳﻚ ﺣﺸﺮه ﺟﻨﮕﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در ﭼﻮب ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮراخ ﺣﺸﺮه ﻣﺪور‬،‫ﻏﻴﺮ از درﺧﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎزﮔﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ آﺑﻲ اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
Ambrosia beetle is a forest beetle which cannot
live in timber other than freshly felled trees, the
hole is circular and not more than 2 mm
diameter and the lining of the hole is stained a
blue color.
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان رﺷﺪ‬2-2-2-6
6.2.2.2 Rate of growth
‫ ﻣﻬﺎرﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻧﺮدهﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻼوه در ﻣﻮرد‬.‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬6 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ از‬25 ‫در ﻫﺮ‬
25 ‫ﭼﻮب ﺑﻠﻮط و زﺑﺎن ﮔﻨﺠﺸﻚ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي رﺷﺪ در ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬16 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
For stiles, treads, rails and bracings the number
of growth rings per 25 mm shall not be less than
6. In addition, in the case of oak and ash the
number of growth rings per 25 mm shall not
exceed 16.
6.2.2.3 Rungs
‫ور‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬3-2-2-6
6.2.2.3.1 Knots
‫ ﮔِﺮِهﻫﺎ‬1-3-2-2-6
Rungs of builders’ pole ladders, single-section
ladders and extending ladders shall be free from
knots.
‫ور ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪ و‬‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺎري از ﮔﺮه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
6.2.2.3.2 Slope of grain
The combined slope of grain shall not be steeper
than 1 in 10, when determined in accordance
with the method described in appendix A and
figure 10.
‫ ارﻳﺐ رﮔﻪ‬2-3-2-2-6
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ ﺑﻪ‬1 ‫ﺑﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ارﻳﺐ رﮔﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﺐدارﺗﺮ از‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس روش ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ و ﺷﻜﻞ‬
15
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬4-2-2-6
6.2.2.4 Stiles of builders’ pole ladders
‫ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ‬1-4-2-2-6
6.2.2.4.1 Knots
The total diameter of the knots within 30 mm of
each side of the center of a rung hole shall not
exceed, when measured on the convex side of
the stiles, one-quarter of the depth of the flat
face of the stiles at this point (see figure 1).
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮف ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬30 ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ در ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
‫ب‬‫ وﻗﺘﻲ در ﻃﺮف ﻣﺤﺪ‬،‫ور ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺣﻔﺮه ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬
،‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺎرم ﻋﻤﻖ ﻃﺮف ﺻﺎف ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.(1 ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
The total diameter of knots allowed in the
remaining region between the 30 mm bands
shall not be more than the depth of the flat face
of the stile measured at a point midway between
adjacent rung holes.
30 ‫ﻛﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز در ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺎف ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در‬
.‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺮهﻫﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪور ﻣﺠﺎز ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
No knot shall exceed 12 mm diameter, in its
greater axis, in the top 4 m of a stile and 20 mm
between that point and the base.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬20 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و‬4 ‫ در ﺑﺎﻻي‬،‫در ﻣﺤﻮر ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮش‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬12 ‫ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺮهاي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ﺑﻴﻦ آن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬2-4-2-2-6
6.2.2.4.2 Surface checks
10×1 ‫ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﭼﻮب ﺗﺎ آﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬.‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮر ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﺮف ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل‬200 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﻋﺮض و‬1/5 ‫ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
Surface checks shall be permitted provided that
the checks do not deviate more than 1 in 10 to
the axis of the stile and shall not be more than
1.5 mm in width or 200 mm in length at the
time of manufacture.
‫ رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺎرﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬3-4-2-2-6
6.2.2.4.3 Spiral grain
Spiral grain having a deviation not steeper than
1 in 10 shall be permitted. Tests shall be carried
out on the convex face of the stile.
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ در‬1 ‫رﮔﻪ ﻣﺎرﭘﻴﭽﻲ داراي اﻧﺤﺮاﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺐدارﺗﺮ از‬
‫ب ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬‫ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﺮف ﻣﺤﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
6.2.2.5 Stiles of single-section ladders,
extending ladders and lightweight stagings
‫ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ و‬،‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬5-2-2-6
‫دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ‬
6.2.2.5.1 Knots
‫ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ‬1-5-2-2-6
Sound knots not over 7 mm in class 1 on their
greater axis shall be permitted provided they do
not occur in the outer quarters of the face.
‫ در ﻣﺤﻮر‬،1 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي در ﻛﻼس‬7 ‫ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻟﻢ و ﺑﻲ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﺟﻮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ در ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﭼﻮب‬2-5-2-2-6
6.2.2.5.2 Surface checks
Surface checks not exceeding 130 mm long or
1.5 mm wide shall be permitted provided they
do not run out to the edge of the face in which
they occur.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬130 ‫ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اداﻣﻪ ﺷﻜﺎف ﺑﻪ‬1/5 ‫از‬
.‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺪ‬
6.2.2.5.3 Selection of stiles (single-section and
extending ladders)
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬3-5-2-2-6
Each stile shall be inspected visually for quality
and finish before assembly.
‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ و ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ آن‬
.‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﻮار ﻛﺮدن‬
‫و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﺣﻔﺮهﻫﺎي رزﻳﻨﻲ‬4-5-2-2-6
6.2.2.5.4 Resin pockets
1/5 ‫ﺣﻔﺮهﻫﺎي رزﻳﻨﻲ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻟﺸﺎن ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻋﺮض ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻲآﻳﻨﺪ و ﻋﺮﺿﺸﺎن ﻫﻢ‬
Resin pockets shall be permitted if their length
is not more than 1½ times the width of the face
16
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
in which they occur and that the width does not
exceed 3 mm and the depth does not extend to
the opposite face.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ و ﻋﻤﻘﺸﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف دﻳﮕﺮ اﻣﺘﺪاد‬3 ‫ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرب‬5-5-2-2-6
6.2.2.5.5 Slope of grain
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬2-3-2-2-6 ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
As specified in paragraph (6.2.2.3.2).
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﻪ‬6-2-2-6
6.2.2.6 All component parts of shelf ladders,
step ladders, trestles and stagings (other than
stiles of stagings)
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي دو ﻃﺮﻓﻪ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﭘﻠﻜﺎﻧﻲ و دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬
.(‫)ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ‬1-6-2-2-6
6.2.2.6.1 Knots
‫اﻟﻒ( ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﻧﻮارﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي‬
a) Knots other than staging slats
‫ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻟﻢ و ﺑﻲ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻳﻚ ﺷﺸﻢ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺮوط‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﮔﺮه ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
25 ‫ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺮهاي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ از‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Sound knots not larger than one-sixth of
the width of the face in which they appear
shall be allowed providing the edge of the
knot is not closer to the edge of the
component than the diameter of the knot.
No knot shall be nearer than 25 mm to any
joint.
‫ب ( ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي دارﺑﺴﺖ‬
b) Staging slats
،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬12 ‫ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻟﻢ و ﺑﻲ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ دور از ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬50 ‫ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎي ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪدار ﻣﺠﺎز‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺪ‬6 ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
Sound knots not larger than 12 mm in
diameter shall be allowed providing they
are at least 50 mm apart. Edge knots shall
be allowed providing they extend no
further than 6 mm from the edge. Splayed
knots shall not be allowed.
‫ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي روﻳﻪ‬2-6-2-2-6
6.2.2.6.2 Surface checks
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬60 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻃﻮل‬1/5 ‫ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎي روﻳﻪ اﮔﺮ داراي ﻋﺮض‬
10 ‫ در‬1 ‫ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اداﻣﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﻨﺪ‬
Surface checks not exceeding 1.5 mm wide and
60 mm long shall be permissible, providing the
check does not deviate by more than 1 in 10 and
does not run out to the edge of the component.
‫ ﺷﻴﺐ رﮔﻪ‬3-6-2-2-6
6.2.2.6.3 Slope of grain
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ رﮔﻪ روي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ از روش‬
10 ‫ در‬1 ‫ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
‫ روي‬.‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻧﻮاع ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ در‬1 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻮب داﮔﻼس ﻓﻴﺮ و‬
‫ رﮔﻪ از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ از ﻳﻚ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲﺷﻮد و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از ورود ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬،‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ دﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
.‫اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
Combined slope of grain on components other
than treads, when determined in accordance
with the method given in Appendix A shall not
exceed 1 in 8 for Douglas fir and 1 in 10 for
other species. On treads, the grain starting from
the top face at one end shall not run out on the
underside before entering the housing at the
other end.
‫ ﺣﺠﻢ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬3-2-6
6.2.3 Moisture content
‫ درﺻﺪ‬22 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬16 ‫ﺣﺠﻢ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در زﻣﺎن ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
.(BS EN 1313 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
The moisture content at the time of manufacture
shall be in the range of 16% to 22% (See BS EN
1313).
17
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺟﺰاء و ﻣﻮاد‬4-2-6
6.2.4 Other components and material
‫ ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ‬1-4-2-6
6.2.4.1 Tie rods
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﻧﺮم ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
:‫در )اﻟﻒ( ﻳﺎ )ب( ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Tie rods, shall be of mild steel, and be as
specified in either (a) or (b).
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺎده ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
a) Plain tie rods shall be not less than 3.9 mm
in diameter, except in the case of folding
trestles, when the rods shall not be less
than 5.9 mm in diameter.
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3/9
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬5/9 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫دواﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از واﺷﺮﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻧﺮم ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و روي‬1/4 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬15
.‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﭘﺮچ و ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
The ends shall be passed through mild
steel washers of 15 mm minimum outside
diameter and not less than 1.4 mm thick,
and shall be securely riveted over them
and smoothly finished.
2/9 ‫ب ( ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﺪه رزوه دار ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
b) Threaded tie rods shall not be less than 2.9
mm diameter with 4 mm rolled threads
and buttons, except in the case of tie rods
for folding trestles, which shall have 6 mm
rolled threads on rods not less than 4.9 mm
diameter.
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ در‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4 ‫ و ﻣﻘﺪار رزوه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬،‫ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
4/6 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻮده و ﻗﻄﺮ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬6 ‫رزوه آﻧﻬﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﻞ ﻣﻴﺨﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺦﻫﺎي ﺳﺮﮔﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬2-4-2-6
6.2.4.2 Ladder buttons
.‫ﮔﻞ ﻣﻴﺨﻬﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻد ﻓﺸﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Ladder buttons shall be of malleable cast iron,
or pressed steel.
6.2.4.3
Reinforcing
reinforcement)
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
wire
(for
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬3-4-2-6
rung
(‫ور‬‫ﻣﺪ‬
Rung reinforcement is optional but when used
the reinforcing wire shall consist of two
galvanized mild steel wires, of not less than 3.5
mm diameter twisted together. Wires shall be
properly tensioned and anchored into the stiles
or retained in position by buttons or other
equally efficient tensioning devices.
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎري اﺳﺖ و در ﺻﻮرت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬
3/5 ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دو ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻧﺮم ﮔﺎﻟﻮاﻧﻴﺰه ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺑﻲ در داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه؛‬،‫ﮔﻞ ﻣﻴﺨﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
6.2.4.4 Reinforcing wire for ladder stiles
Reinforcing wire for ladder stiles shall consist
of a seven wire strand, of mild steel wire having
a characteristic strength of 425 N/mm2
minimum, and of the appropriate overall
diameter as given in tables 3,5 and 6 of any
other suitable reinforcement of equivalent
strength. When such reinforcement is specified
in these tables it shall be fitted under tension
into grooves in the stiles and anchored securely
so as to pretension the stiles. The material shall
pass through the stiles beyond the end rungs and
be not less than 100 mm from the stile ends and
shall be anchored so that the stiles are not cut
into when under load.
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬4-4-2-6
‫ رﺷﺘﻪ‬7 ‫ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬425 ‫ﺳﻴﻢ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﻧﺮم و ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬
‫ از ﻫﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬6 ‫ و‬3/5 ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ و ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪاول‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ از ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪاول ﻓﻮق اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻪ‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ و ﺑﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ وراي اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ از ﻣﻴﺎن ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬.‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬100 ‫ﺑﮕﺬرﻧﺪ و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
18
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﻴﺦﻫﺎ‬5-4-2-6
6.2.4.5 Nails
‫ﻣﻴﺦﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻒ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
60 ‫ ﭘﻴﭻدار ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل‬،‫ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎرﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
‫ور‬‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﻣﺪ‬2/5 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬2 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬60 ‫و دواﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﻮي ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ﻃﻮر اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Nails for securing treads of steps and the tops of
swing back steps shall be either wire, twisted, or
screw nails nominally 60 mm long and 2.5 mm
diameter, or annular ring shank nails nominally
60 mm long with a 2 mm diameter shank.
‫ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ‬6-4-2-6
6.2.4.6 Screws
‫ﭘﻴﭻﻫــﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻻدي و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑــﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬BS 1210
Screws shall be of steel and shall comply with
the strength requirements of BS 1210.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7 Fittings for extending ladders
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7.1 General
All metal fittings shall be of steel, wrought iron,
malleable cast iron, or aluminum of suitable
strength, and shall be well finished and securely
fitted. On rope-operated ladders the pulley
wheel may be of cast iron or nylon, or other
material of adequate strength and durability to
provide a factor of safety of not less than eight
times the weight of the extending section or
sections.
‫ ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم ﻳﺎ‬،‫ آﻫﻦ ﻧﺮم‬،‫ﺗﻤﺎم اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻓﻮﻻد‬
‫ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬،‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻃﻨﺎب‬.‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻗﻪ ﭼﺮخ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ از ﭼﺪن ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻳﻠﻮن و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ از‬
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻛﺎﻓﻲ و ﺑﺎدوام ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ وزن‬
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
All bearing and rubbing surfaces of the hooks
shall be finished smooth and shall be free from
sharp edges liable to cause indentation of the
stiles or rungs.
‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه و اﺻﻄﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎف ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻮد و ﻋﺎري از ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ور و ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺸﻮد‬‫ﻣﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﻼبﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬2-7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7.2 Fixed and latching hooks
‫ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻃﻮل اﻧﺘﻬـﺎي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬12 ‫ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ آﻧﻬـﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ور ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ﻣﺪ‬
Fixed and latching hooks shall be such that they
bear evenly over a length of not less than 12 mm
along each end of the engaged rung.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
،‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻼبﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ آﻟﻴﺎژ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ور ﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻮرد‬‫ﺑﻬﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻼبﻫﺎ و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﺻﺪﻣﻪاي وارد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
Where aluminum alloy fixed hooks or latching
hooks are used in conjunction with rungs or
treads treated with a copper containing
preservative, the intermittent contact between
the hooks and the preservative is not considered
to be deleterious to the aluminum.
‫ ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻫﺎدي‬3-7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7.3 Guide brackets
‫ درﺻﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬75 ‫ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ و‬
‫ اﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ و ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻲ را در‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن‬75 ‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻗﻼبﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰاري‬.‫ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد و‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم و ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ اﺛﺮﮔﺬارد‬
‫ ﺷﻌﺎع داﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻢ‬.‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻃﺮف و ﺻﺎف ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The brackets shall enclose one side and 75% of
the back of the stile to which they are fixed and
provide a bearing on the front of the sliding stile
of not less than 75% of the stile width. The
brackets shall be properly formed with no tool
marks that could affect their strength or
performance and shall have all sharp corners
removed. The internal radius of any bend shall
not be less than the thickness of the material.
19
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدآوري‪ :‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪Fig. 1- KNOTS IN STILES OF BUILDERS POLE LADDERS‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -1‬ﮔﺮهﻫﺎ در ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎنﻫﺎ‬
‫‪20‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
When tested in accordance with Appendix M a
bracket shall show no sign of distortion or
permanent deflection and the bracket fixings
shall not have become loosened or be damaged.
‫ در ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )م( اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪاي از ﻛﺠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ داﻳﻤﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﻮد و‬
.‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻞ و ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
Each bracket shall be securely fitted by at least
one bolt and one countersunk wood screw.
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻬﺮه و ﭘﻴﭻ ﺧﺰاﻧﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
A pair of guide brackets shall be fitted to each
section other than the top section.
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ از ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻫﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺎر ﻫﺎدي‬4-7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7.4 Guide groove
‫ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬،‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺎر ﻫﺎدي ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎور ﺷﻴﺎر ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ و‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪن و ﺟﺪاﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮش‬
‫دﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ زﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻧﺮم ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد و ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮاﻧﺐ و ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي دﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ را‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
Where a guide groove is employed and it is
necessary for a cut out to be formed adjacent to
the groove, the openings so formed by the cut
away portion, to facilitate the removal of an
upper section from the lower section, shall be
protected by a mild steel plate, designed to
protect the sides and edges of the openings.
‫ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬5-7-4-2-6
6.2.4.7.5 Latching device
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ از ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
،‫ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺎره ﻳﺎ ﺷﻞ ﺷﺪن ﻃﻨﺎب ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ اﺗﻔﺎق‬
.‫از ﺳﻘﻮط ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
The design of the latching device in ladders of
the rope-operated type shall be such that in the
event of the rope breaking or being released
accidentally, it engages and arrests the descent
of the ladder section.
‫ اﻧﻮاع ﺧﺎص‬-7
7. SPECIFIC TYPES
:‫اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
The following types are included in this
Standard.
a) Single section and extending (aluminum)
refer to Appendix. M(a).
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ‬
b) Single section and extending (wood) refer
to Appendix. M(a).
‫ب ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م‬
c)
‫ج ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻄﺒﻖ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )ب( رﺟﻮع‬
Shelf ladders
Appendix. M(b).
(aluminum)
refer
.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )اﻟﻒ( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫)اﻟﻒ( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
to
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
d) Shelf ladders (wood) refer to Appendix.
M(b).
.‫د ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻄﺒﻖ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )ب( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
e) Swing back steps (aluminum) refer to
Appendix. M(c).
(‫ﻫـ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )ج‬
f) Swing back steps (wood) refer to Appendix.
M(c).
‫و ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )ج( رﺟﻮع‬
g)
‫ز ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻗﺎب ﻋﻘﺐ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ‬
Backed steps
Appendix. M(d).
(aluminum)
refer
.‫رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
to
.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )د( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
21
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
h) Backed steps (wood) refer to Appendix.
M(d).
‫ح ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻗﺎب ﻋﻘﺐ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ‬
i) Folding trestles (aluminum) refer to
Appendix. M(e).
‫ط ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد دوﻟﻨﮕﻪاي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ‬
j) Folding trestles (wood) refer to Appendix.
M(e).
‫ي ( ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد دوﻟﻨﮕﻪاي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‬
k) Lightweight stagings (aluminum) refer to
Appendix. M(f).
‫ك ( دارﺑﺴﺖ ﺳﺒﻚ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )و( رﺟﻮع‬
m) Lightweight stagings (wood) refer to
Appendix. M(f).
.‫ل ( دارﺑﺴﺖ ﺳﺒﻚ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )و( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )د( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م )ﻫ( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫م )ﻫ( رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
(‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬1-7
7.1 Single Section and Extending (Aluminum)
7.1.1 Construction
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬1-1-7
7.1.1.1 Lengths
‫ ﻃﻮل‬1-1-1-7
،‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬17 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
The lengths of single-section ladders and
extending ladders when fully extended shall not
exceed the 17m in class 1.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬2-1-1-7
7.1.1.2 Distance between stiles
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ در ﻣﻌﺎدﻟﻪ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
The clear distance between the stiles at any
point (in mm) shall not be less than that
determined by the following equation:
Minimum width a tany point =
L
 230
200
‫= ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﭘﻬﻨﺎ در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
L
 230
200
: ‫ﻛﻪ‬
Where:
.‫( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن )ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( اﺳﺖ‬L)
L is the distance from any point to the top of the
ladder (in mm).
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ‬3-1-1-7
7.1.1.3 Feet
،‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﭼﻮب ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮد و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻔﺼﻞدار ﺗﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬،‫ﻣﺎدهاي ﺿﺪﻟﻐﺰش‬
‫ ﻃﻮل‬.‫ﺷﻮد وﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺘﻮان ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮآﻣﺪﮔﻲ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The lower end of each stile shall be closed by
blocks of hardwood, plastics or rubber or fitted
with an articulated foot soled with slip resistant
material. The feet shall project to form a
wearing surface and shall be securely fixed but
easily removable for renewal. The length of
projection of the blocks or fittings shall be taken
into account when determining the overall
length of the ladder.
‫ور‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬4-1-1-7
7.1.1.4 Rungs
‫ﺗﻤﺎم‬.‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري ﻫﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻟﻐﺰش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﺟﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ و‬
‫اﮔﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون زده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن‬
.‫ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﺮاﺣﺘﻲ وارد ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬
Each rung shall have a textured surface on the
working face to reduce slipping. All rungs shall
be securely fixed so as not to rotate in their
supports and if the ends of the rungs protrude
through the stiles they shall be smoothly
finished so as not to injure a user’s hands.
22
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ور‬‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬5-1-1-7
7.1.1.5 Spacing of rungs
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺟﺎي‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬250 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ در ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﺎه‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬125 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
Rungs shall be uniformly spaced at 250 mm to
300 mm centers. The distance from the ends of
the stiles to the nearest rungs center shall be 125
mm to 300 mm.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬6-1-1-7
7.1.1.6 Fittings for extending ladders
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺪرج‬1 ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺣﺎﻣﻞ روي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻴﺎج ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي‬
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دارد ﺗﺎ ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎ را از ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ و‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬.‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ وارد ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﺷﺎن واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ و اﮔﺮ از ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب‬
‫ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺎره ﻳﺎ آزاد‬:‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و از ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺷﺪن ﻃﻨﺎب‬
‫ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎ‬.‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آورﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﻔﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬.‫ﺑﺎﻻرﻓﺘﻦ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻫﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون‬.‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎن روي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
،‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﮕﺬاري ﻛﻪ روي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آﻧﻬﺎ اﺛﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺬارد‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Fittings for extending ladders shall be such that
the width of parts bearing on the rungs is not
less than that given in Table 1.
The shape of hooks shall be such as to require
upward movement of the upper section to
disengage them from the rungs. The fittings
shall have no sharp edges liable to cause
indentation of the stiles or rungs. Latching
devices, if fitted, shall not be dependent for their
operation on springs and, if of the rope-operated
type, they shall be such that in the event of the
rope breaking or being released they engage
automatically and prevent uncontrolled closure
of the ladder, where the latches are acting as a
pair, they shall be connected to ensure
movement in unison. The latches or fixed hooks
shall bear equally on the rungs. Guide brackets
shall be formed with no tool marks that would
affect their strength or performance. Any sharp
corners shall be removed.
TABLE 1 - FITTINGS FOR EXTENDING LADDERS
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
MAJOR HORIZONTAL RUNG
DIMENSION OR DIAMETER
MINIMUM WIDTH OF FITTING BEARING
ON SURFACE OF RUNGS
‫ﭘﻠﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ اﺻﻠﻲ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺣﺎﻣﻞ روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
mm
mm
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
Up to and including 31
12.0
31 ‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
Over 31 and under 39
9.5
39 ‫ و زﻳﺮ‬31 ‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
39 and greater
6.0
‫ و ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ‬39
‫ ﻃﻨﺎبﻫﺎ‬7-1-1-7
7.1.1.7 Ropes
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻃﻨﺎب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺟﺮم ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎزﺷﻮ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬8
The strength of rope attachments shall be such
as to provide a factor of safety of not less than 8
times the mass of the extending section or
sections.
23
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﻒ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬،BS 6125:1982 ‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﻗﻄﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ ﻃﻨﺎب و ﺑﺎر ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪول‬
Ropes shall be hemp sash cord, made from yarn,
complying with table 1 of BS 6125 :1982 or
other material of equivalent strength. The
nominal diameter of the ropes and breaking load
shall not be less than the appropriate values
given in table 2.
TABLE 2 - ROPES FOR EXTENDING LADDERS
‫ ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬-2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LADDER DUTY RATING
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪي اﻧﺠﺎم وﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
MINIMUM NOMINAL
DIAMETER OF ROPES
MINIMUM BREAKING
LOAD
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
Class 1
1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
mm
kg
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
10
410
7.1.1.8 Overlap of sections of extending
ladders
‫ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬8-1-1-7
When fully extended, the effective overlap
between adjacent sections of the ladder shall not
be less than the following:
‫ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑــﺎن ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻣﻲﻳـﺎﺑﺪ‬
:‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎور ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) 1.5t for closed lengths up to and including
5 m;
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬5 ‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎ‬+) ‫ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬1 (‫اﻟﻒ‬
b) 2.5t for closed lengths over 5m and up to
and including 6m;
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5 ‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺶ از‬+) ‫ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬2 ( ‫ب‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﺑﻪ‬6 ‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺶ از‬+) ‫ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬3 ( ‫ج‬
c) 3.5t for closed lengths over 6m (see also
Fig. 3).
.(‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3 ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
:‫ﻛﻪ‬
Where:
‫ور ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬t
t is the spacing of rungs (in mm).
– ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ و ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬2-7
7.2 Single Section and Extending Sections
(Wood-Class I)
(1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
7.2.1 Single-Section
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬1-2-7
7.2.1.1 Stiles
1-1-2-7
The finished sizes of stiles shall be in
accordance with Table 3. The ends of the stiles
shall be suitably chamfered or rounded, and the
edges shall have a small radius to remove the
sharp corners.
‫ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3 ‫اﻧﺪازه ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮرب ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮد ﺷﻮد و ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎ داراي اﻧﺤﻨﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي ﺑﺮاي از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮدن ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
24
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
TABLE 3 - STILE SIZES OF CLASS 1 SINGLE-SECTION LADDERS
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬1 ‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬-3 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF LADDER
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
OVER
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
MINIMUM
CROSS SECTION
STILE REINFORCEMENT
OVERALL DIAMETER
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
m
m
mm
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.3
69 × 31
82×31
89×35
None
5.38
5.9
Note:
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Ladders designed for use where there may be
electrical hazards may have the stile
reinforcement omitted provided the width of the
stile is increased by 6 mm.
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮات‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺑﺮق وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‬،‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺣﺬف ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬6 ‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺗﺎ‬
7.2.1.2 Distance between stiles
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬2-1-2-7
The minimum width between the inner surfaces
of the stiles at any point shall not be less than
235 mm and at the bottom not less than the
appropriate value in table-4.
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و در ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺪرج در‬235
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
TABLE 4 - MINIMUM INSIDE WIDTH OF LADDERS
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻋﺮض داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬-4 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF LADDER
MINIMUM INSIDE
WIDTH AT BOTTOM
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
OVER
‫ﺷﻴﺮ از‬
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻋﺮض داﺧﻠﻲ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
m
m
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.4
242
247
252
257
262
267
272
277
282
287
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬3-1-2-7
7.2.1.3 Rungs
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-3-1-2-7
7.2.1.3.1 General
‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﺺ آﻧﻬﺎ در‬.‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪور ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
Rungs shall be either rectangular or circular.
Typical rung patterns are shown in Fig. 2.
25
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺑﺪون‬،‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮراﺧﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮراﺧﻬﺎ در ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬.‫ وارد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮدو‬،‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ آﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬BS EN 301
All rungs shall be a drive fit into their holes and
shall not rotate. The end of the rungs or the
holes in the stiles, or both, shall be coated with
the adhesive specified in BS EN 301
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‬2-3-1-2-7
7.2.1.3.2 Rectangular rungs
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﻤﺎم‬36×22 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ه دوﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ‬‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ و ﮔَﻮ‬8 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ زﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺳﻮراﺧﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺎً ﺟﺎي ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬12 ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
Rectangular rungs shall not be less than 36 mm
× 22 mm and shall be housed full section 5 mm
to 8 mm deep into the stile, through tenoned and
double wedged. The tenons shall be the full
depth of the rungs and not less than 12 mm
thick.
‫ور‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬3-3-1-2-7
7.2.1.3.3 Circular rungs
:‫ور ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت )اﻟﻒ( ﻳﺎ )ب( ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
Circular rungs shall be as given in either (a) or
(b):
a) Tapered, with a minimum center diameter
of 35 mm;
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ؛‬35 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻗﻄﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬،‫اﻟﻒ( دوﻛﻲ‬
b) Parallel, with a minimum diameter of 31
mm.
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬31 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ‬،‫ب ( ﻣﻮازي‬
:‫( ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬3) ‫( ﺗﺎ‬1) ‫ور ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬‫دوﺳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
The ends of circular rungs shall be as given in
(1) to (3):
1) Cylindrical;
See Fig. 2, (b), (d) and (e)
(‫ )د( و )ﻫ( ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،(‫ )ب‬2 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫( ﻣﺪور؛‬1
2) Tapered;
See Fig. 2, (b), (d) and (e)
(‫ )د( و )ﻫ( ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،(‫ )ب‬2 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫( دوﻛﻲ؛‬2
3) Shouldered;
See Fig. 2, (b), (d) and (e)
(‫ )د( و )ﻫ( ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،(‫ )ب‬2 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫( ﺷﺎﻧﻪدار؛‬3
A cylindrical end shall have a diameter at the
point of entry into the stile between 25 mm and
28 mm and shall butt against the end of a blind
hole, terminating between 9 mm and 12 mm
from the outer face of the stile.
‫ور در ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ورود ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮراخ ﺳﺘﻮن‬‫ﻗﻄﺮ دوﺳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﻮراخ‬28 ‫ و‬25 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ‬12 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬9 ‫ و ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻪ آن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ وارد ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺧﺘﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬
A tapered end shall have a diameter at the point
of entry into the stile of between 25 mm and 31
mm and reduce to between 16 mm and 19 mm.
31 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬25 ‫دوﺳﺮ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ورود ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬19 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬16 ‫ و ﺗﺎ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
A shouldered end shall have a diameter at a
point of entry into the stile of between 28 mm
and 35 mm. It shall be housed between 5 mm
and 8 mm full section into the stile reducing
thereafter to between 16 mm and 22 mm. In no
case shall a shoulder butt closely against the
inner face of the stile without housing.
35 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬28 ‫دوﺳﺮ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ورود ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ‬8 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5 ‫ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬22 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬16 ‫ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﺎي ﮔﻴﺮد و از آن ﭘﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫در ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻮردي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ وارد ﺷﻮد‬
Tapered and shouldered ends of rungs shall be
finished flush with the outer surfaces of the
stiles, or if in blind holes, between 6 mm 12 mm
from the outer surface.
‫دوﺳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي دوﻛﻲ و ﺷﺎﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻲﻋﻴﺐ و ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﻮح‬
‫ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮراﺧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬،‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ ﻫﻤﺘﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬12 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬6 ‫ ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
26
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬4-1-2-7
7.2.1.4 Spacing of rungs
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬250 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي ﻳﻜﺴﺎن در وﺳﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ در ﻣﻮردي ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮوﺗﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ از اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﺎ وﺳﻂ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬125
.‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
Rungs shall be uniformly spaced at centers of
250 mm to 300 mm, except in the case of the
top and bottom rung, which may be positioned
at a distance of between 125 mm and 300 mm
measured from the end of the stile to the center
of the nearest rung.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-1-2-7
7.2.1.5 Tie-Rod and rung reinforcement
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5-1-2-7
7.2.1.5.1 General
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﻲ در ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر و ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ واﺷﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎف ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از زﺧﻤﻲ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻬﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
The ladders shall be provided with tie-rods or
reinforcing wires. Any projection of tie-rods,
reinforcing wires or washers above the surface
of the stiles shall be smoothed off to prevent
injury to the hands of the user.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬2-5-1-2-7
7.2.1.5.2 Tie-Rods
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً زﻳﺮ اوﻟﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ دوﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ از ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن و زﻳﺮﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ور ﺟﺪا از ﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬‫از ﻧﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬
Tie-rods, if used, shall be fitted immediately
below the first or second rung from each end of
the ladder and below intermediate rungs at
points not more than nine rungs apart.
27
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)اﻟﻒ( ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ در ﺑﺮش‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ و ﮔَﻮ‪‬ه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ب( اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‪‬ور ﻣﻮازي‬
‫)ج( اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪور ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﺎي‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫)د( اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺮاز‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮراخ ﺷﺪه وﻳﺎ ﺳﻮراخ ﻣﺴﺪود‬
‫ﺷﺪه‬
‫)ﻫـ( اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪور ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺪاري ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن درﺟﻪ ‪2‬‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪Fig. 2- TYPICAL RUNG PATTERNS‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -2‬ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ 3-5-1-2-7‬ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪7.2.1.5.3 Reinforcing wires‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‪ ،‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ و در زﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻠﻪاي ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً در ﻋﺮض ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Reinforcing wires, if used, shall be fitted‬‬
‫‪adjacent to and underneath each rung centrally‬‬
‫‪in the width of the stile.‬‬
‫‪ 6-1-2-7‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪7.2.1.6 Back reinforcement of stiles‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪول ‪ 3‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Back reinforcement shall be fitted and shall be‬‬
‫‪in accordance with Table 3.‬‬
‫‪ 2-2-7‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪه‬
‫‪7.2.2 Extending sections‬‬
‫‪ 1-2-2-7‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪7.2.2.1 Stiles‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول ‪ 5‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﺦدار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﻴﺰي‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺮف ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪The finished sizes of stiles shall be in‬‬
‫‪accordance with Table 5. The ends of the stiles‬‬
‫‪shall be chamfered or rounded and edges shall‬‬
‫‪have a small radius to remove the sharp corners.‬‬
‫‪ 2-2-2-7‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪7.2.2.2 Distance between stiles‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ( ﺳﻄﻮح داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ‪ 235‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 360‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪The width between the inner surfaces of the‬‬
‫‪stiles of the top section shall be not less than‬‬
‫‪235 mm and not more than 360 mm. The stiles‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
shall be parallel. The width of the sections of
extending ladders shall be such as to provide a
minimum clearance consistent with the
operation of the ladder.
‫ ﻋﺮض‬.‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪه ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺣﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﺛﺎﺑﺖ را ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
7.2.2.3 Overlap of sections, rungs, rung
spacing and tie-rods
،‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪه‬3-2-2-7
Items of the above headline shall comply with
clauses 7.1.1.8, 7.2.1.3, 7.2.1.4 and 7.2.1.5.
4-1-2-7 ،3-1-2-7 ،8-1-1-7 ‫اﻳﻦ اﻗﻼم ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬5-1-2-7 ‫و‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ و ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ‬
TABLE 5 - PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS FOR CLASS 1 EXTENDING LADDERS
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬1 ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻼس‬-5 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF LADDER CLOSED
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
MINIMUM
CROSS
SECTION
STILES
STILES
REINFORCEMENT
OVERALL DIAMETER
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
LADDER TYPE
‫ﻧﻮع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
OVER
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
ROPE DIAMETER
(NOMINAL)
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻃﻨﺎب اﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
Doubles
(a) ropeless
‫دوﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫)اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺪون ﻃﻨﺎب‬
(b) with ropes
Or ropeless*
‫)ب( ﺑﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون‬
‫ﻃﻨﺎب‬
(c) with ropes
‫)ج( ﺑﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب‬
Trebles
(a) rope less
‫)اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺪون ﻃﻨﺎب‬
(b)
with ropes
‫)ب( ﺑﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب‬
m
m
mm
mm
mm
__
3.0
69 × 28
__
__
3.0
5.0
69 × 31
__
Rope optional 10
5.0
6.25
82×31
5.38
10
6.25
7.3
89×35
5.38
10
__
3.0
69 × 31
__
__
__
3.0
4.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
69×31
69×31
93×31
__
5.38
6.40
10
10
10
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ‬4/5 ‫* ﺷﺪﻳﺪاً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ از‬
‫ﻃﻨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد و دﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ از ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪه ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ‬
.‫دﻳﻮار ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
* It is strongly recommended that extension
ladders longer than 4.5 m should be ropeoperated and that care be taken to avoid
compression damage by bumping against a wall
or support.
30
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫ﻃﻮل دﻣﺎﻏﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎدي اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻃﻮل دﻣﺎﻏﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎدي اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻃﻮل دﻣﺎﻏﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎدي اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪Fig. 3- OVERLAPS OF EXTENDING LADDERS‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -3‬ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ 3-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫)‪7.3 Shelf Ladders (Aluminum‬‬
‫‪ 1-3-7‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫‪7.3.1 Construction‬‬
‫‪ 1-1-3-7‬ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫‪7.3.1.1 Lengths‬‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ 1-1-1-7‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The lengths of shelf ladders shall be as specified‬‬
‫‪in 7.1.1.1.‬‬
‫‪ 2-1-3-7‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫‪7.3.1.2 Distance between stiles‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻮازي و دوﻛﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
‫)اﻟﻒ( و )ب( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪The distance between stiles for parallel-sided‬‬
‫‪ladders and tapered ladders shall be as given in‬‬
‫‪(a) and (b).‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ( دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻮازي‬
‫‪a) Parallel-Sided ladders‬‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ‪ 355‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The working width between the inner edges‬‬
‫‪of the stiles shall be not less than 355 mm.‬‬
‫ب ( دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ دوﻛﻲ‬
‫‪b) Tapered ladders‬‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ‪ 250‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫‪The working width between the inner edges‬‬
‫‪of the stiles at the level of the uppermost‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
tread shall be not less than 250 mm. This
dimension shall be increased by 12 mm to 25
mm per tread for each successive tread below
the uppermost tread.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺘﻮاﻟﻲ ﺗﺎ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬25 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬12
.‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬3-1-3-7
7.3.1.3 Feet
،‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺨﺖ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻘﺮار‬.‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ وﻟﻲ‬،‫روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺠﺪد ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The lower ends of the stiles shall be fitted with
feet of hardwood, plastics or rubber. The feet
shall project to form a wearing surface, and
shall be securely fixed but easily removable for
renewal.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬4-1-3-7
7.3.1.4 Treads
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﻄﺢ‬75 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ از ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﺗﺎ‬65 ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ زاوﻳﻪاي ﺑﻴﻦ‬.‫روﻳﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﺟﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ درﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ اﻓﻘﻲ اﺳﺖ‬77
Treads shall be not less than 75 mm wide from
back to front and shall have textured upper
surfaces. When the ladder is inclined at any one
angle within 65° to 77° to the horizontal the
treads shall be horizontal.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-1-3-7
7.3.1.5 Spacing of treads
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬225 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ از‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﭘﺎﻳﻪ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬300 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬125 ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
Treads shall be uniformly spaced at 225 mm to
300 mm. The distance from the bottom of the
stiles to the upper surface of the lowest tread
shall be 125 mm to 300 mm.
(1 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬4-7
7.4 Shelf Ladders (Wood Class 1)
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬1-4-7
7.4.1 Wood type shelf ladders shall comply with
the appropriate requirements of paragraph (6.2)
and the following clauses.
.‫( و ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-6)
‫ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬2-4-7
7.4.2 Stiles
‫دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه و‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6
.‫ﭘﺦدار ﮔﺮدد‬
The finished sizes of stiles shall be in
accordance with table 6. The bottom ends of the
stiles shall be cut parallel with the treads and
suitably chamfered.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬3-4-7
7.4.3 Distance between stiles
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﻣﻮازي‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬375 ‫ و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬250 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
550 ‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬
The width at the top of the ladder between the
inner faces of the stiles shall not be less than
250 mm and not more than 375 mm. When the
stiles are not parallel, the distance between them
at any point on the ladder shall not exceed 550
mm.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬4-4-7
7.4.4 Treads
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬89×22 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم اﻳﻦ‬.(16 ‫ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬.‫ﻃﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5 ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬8 ‫ﺟﺎي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎ دو ﻣﻴﺦ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎي درﺟﻪ‬
.‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻪاي زﻳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ آﺧﺮي ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
Treads shall consist of machined timber 89 mm
× 22 mm minimum section (see Fig. 16). They
shall be housed 5 mm to 6 mm full section into
the stile and shall be secured in position with
two nails or two 50 mm no. 8 gage screws. A
pair of corner blocks or brackets shall be fitted
underneath of the bottom tread. Shelf ladders
shall be so designed that when the treads are
32
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
horizontal the ladder is inclined at an angle of
75 ±2° to the horizontal.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ درﺟــﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬75 ±2 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑــﻪ زاوﻳﻪ‬،‫اﻓﻘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-4-7
7.4.5 Spacing of treads
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬4-1-2-7 ‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬600 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
As specified in paragraph (7.2.1.4) in addition,
if a cross bar is fitted then the distance from the
top tread to the top of the stiles shall be a
maximum of 600 mm.
TABLE 6 - DIMENSIONS OF STILES FOR CLASS 1 SHELF LADDERS
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻛﻼس‬-6 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF SHELF LADDERS
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ‬
OVER
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
MINIMUM
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
m
m
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-2.5
2.5
4.0
69 × 28
69×31
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪ‬6-4-7
7.4.6 Tie-Rods and tread reinforcement
Shelf ladders shall be fitted with tie-rods or
reinforcing wires. Any projection of the rods,
reinforcing wires or washers above the surface
of the stiles shall be smoothed off to prevent
injury to the hands of the user.
‫ ﻫﺮ‬.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ واﺷﺮﻫﺎ روي ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ﺑﺮآﻣﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎف ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻬﺎي‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
Tie-rods, if used, shall be fitted, at least
immediately below the second tread from the
bottom of the ladder and below other treads at
points not more than four treads apart.
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﮔﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﭼﻬﺎرﭘﻠﻪ دور‬،‫دوﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ از ﭘﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن و زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ در ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫از ﻫﻢ‬
Reinforcing wire, if used, shall be fitted
adjacent to and underneath each tread centrally
in the width of the stiles.
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﮔﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﺮﭘﻠﻪاي در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
(‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬5-7
7.5 Swing Back Steps (Aluminum)
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬1-5-7
7.5.1 Construction
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬1-1-5-7
7.5.1.1 Distance between stiles
paragraph
.‫ )ب( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬2-1-3-7 ‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
7.5.1.2 Stiles
Stiles shall be of sufficient width to provide
secure bearing for the treads. The steps shall be
designed so that when fully open the inclination
of the front stiles to the horizontal is within the
following limits:
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬2-1-5-7
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪودهﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
65 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬1675 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﺎ‬
The requirements given
(7.3.1.2(b)) shall apply.
in
a) Steps of heights up to 1675 mm: not less
33
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
than 65° and not more than 70°;
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬70 ‫درﺟﻪ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬1675 ‫ب ( ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
b) steps of heights over 1675 mm: not less
than 65 ° and not more than 75°.
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬75 ‫ درﺟﻪ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬65
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬75 ‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬1 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻼس‬
.‫از ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
For class 1 step the stiles shall be at least 75 mm
from front to back.
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬3-1-5-7
7.5.1.3 Back
:‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﻻ ﺷﻮد‬
A back shall be hinged to the top by means of:
a) A single hinge extending across the full
width of the steps; or
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻻ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﻮل ﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﺮض ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اداﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ؛ ﻳﺎ‬
b) A pair of hinges of wrought or forged
aluminum alloy, steel or malleable cast
iron; or
‫ب( ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻟﻮﻻي ﺑﺎز آﻟﻴﺎژ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻛﺎرﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻد ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم؛ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ج ( ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ وﺳﻂ‬
c) Pin hinges.
:‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از دوﻃﺮﻳﻖ زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The back shall be constructed of either:
‫( ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و ﻧﺮده؛ ﻳﺎ‬1
1) Stiles and rails; or
‫ور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﻫــﺎي‬‫( ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و ﭘﻠﻪﻫــﺎي ﻣﺪ‬2
2) Stiles and rungs in accordance with
(7.1.1.4), (7.1.1.5) and (7.5.1.2). Rungs
shall be spaced such that the top of the
rungs and treads are at the same level
when the steps are opened.
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-1-5-7 ‫ و‬5-1-1-7 ‫ و‬4-1-1-7
‫ور ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
‫ور و ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬،‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ‬4-1-5-7
7.5.1.4 Feet
‫ ﭼﻬﺎر ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬،‫ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺗﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻮب ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاد ﺗﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ و در ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺪد ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The four feet of the steps shall all be on the
same plane when the steps are in the open
position and shall be soled with hardwood,
plastics, or rubber. The soling material shall be
securely fixed but easily removable for renewal.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-1-5-7
7.5.1.5 Treads
Treads shall be not less than 75 mm wide from
back to front and shall have textured upper
surfaces. The steps shall be so designed that
when they are in use on a level surface the
treads are horizontal ±2°.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﻄﻮح روي آﻧﻬﺎ‬75 ‫ﻋﺮض ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ آﺟﺪار ﮔﺮدد و ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻟﻐﺰش‬
‫ درﺟﻪ‬±2 ‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺳﻄﻮح آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮاز و اﻓﻘﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
For class 1 steps the whole of the tread section
shall be within the outline of the stiles.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭼﻬﺎر‬1 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻠﻜﺎنﻫﺎي درﺟﻪ‬
.‫ﭼﻮب ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬6-1-5-7
7.5.1.6 Number of treads
Swing back steps shall have any number of
treads up to maximum of 16 steps in class 1.
‫ ردﻳﻒ در ﻛﻼس‬16 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1
7.5.1.7 Spacing of treads
The procedure given in paragraph (7.3.1.5) shall
be followed.
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬7-1-5-7
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﺷﻮد‬5-1-3-7 ‫از روش ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
34
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬8-1-5-7
7.5.1.8 Top
100 ‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن از ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﻳﺎ اﻃﺮاف ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
30 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﻲ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﺟﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
The top shall not be less than 100 mm wide
from back to front and may overhang at the
back, front or sides, except that any projection at
the front shall not exceed 30 mm. The upper
face shall have a textured surface.
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬9-1-5-7
7.5.1.9 Restriction of opening
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و‬2-1-5-7
‫ درﺟﻪ‬80 ‫ درﺟﻪ و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬72 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺑﻮدن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ‬.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آورد‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎز ﺑﻮدن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن در وﺳﻂ‬
.‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
The degree of opening of the steps shall be
limited by means of a locking bar on each side
between the front stile and the back so that
when fully extended the inclination of the front
stiles is that specified in (7.5.1.2) for steps of
the appropriate height, and that of the back not
less than 72° and not more than 80°.
The locking bar or device shall engage
positively in the open position to form a rigid
connection between the front and back sections.
Folding stay bars shall positively engage in the
open position by locking over center.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه(ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬،‫ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺮوﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
One piece type locking bars (or tie bars) may be
used providing that they are designed and fixed
higher on the front of the step and lower on the
back to ensure that forces are transmitted to the
lower part of the back leg assembly.
(‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ)ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬6-7
7.6 Swing Back Steps (Wood)
1 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﻛﻼس‬1-6-7
7.6.1 Wood type swing back steps class 1
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬1 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﻛﻼس‬1-1-6-7
7.6.1.1 Wood type swing back steps class 1
shall comply with the appropriate requirements
of paragraph (6.2) and of the following clauses.
:‫ و ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-6 ‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬2-1-6-7
7.6.1.2 Front stiles
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬7 ‫اﻧﺪازه ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول‬
.‫ ﭘﺦدار ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮد ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
The finished sizes of front stiles shall be those
specified in Table 7. The bottom ends of the
stiles shall either be cut parallel with the treads
and suitably chamfered, or shall be rounded.
35
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
TABLE 7 - DIMENSIONS OF STILES FOR CLASS 1 SWING BACK STEPS
1 ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﻛﻼس‬-7 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF STEPS
MINIMUM CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
OVER
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
FRONT
BACK
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
m
m
mm
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-1.8
1.8
4.0
69 × 28
69×31
64 × 25
69×31
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬3-1-6-7
7.6.1.3 Distance between front stiles
250 ‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮح داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﺮض‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬375 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﭼﻨﺎن‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬500 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬550 ‫ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻳﻞﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ از‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬50 ‫ و‬25 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
The width between the inner surfaces of the
front stiles shall not be less than 250 mm and
not more than 375 mm at the top of the steps.
The width shall be greater by between 25 mm
and 50 mm for each 500 mm of stile length
below the top of the steps such that the longest
unsupported tread does not exceed 550 mm.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬4-1-6-7
7.6.1.4 Treads
Treads shall consist of wrought rectangular
timber 89 mm × 22 mm minimum section (see
Fig. 16).
89×22 ‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻮب ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮش‬
.(‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬16 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
They should be housed 5 mm to 6 mm full
section into the stiles and shall be secured in
position with two nails or two 50 mm no. 8 gage
screws.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮش داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داﺧﻞ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5
‫ ﻣﻴﺦ ﻳﺎ دو ﭘﻴﭻ‬2 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﺎي ﮔﻴﺮد و در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬8 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي درﺟﻪ‬50
A pair of corner blocks or brackets shall be
fitted underneath the bottom tread. Steps shall
be so designed that the treads are horizontal
when the steps are fully opened. The top of the
steps shall be included in the number of treads
for ordering purposes.
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻧﺒﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻻي‬.‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪادي ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﺳﻔﺎرش دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-1-6-7
7.6.1.5 Spacing of treads
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬5-1-3-7 ‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
Spacing of treads shall comply with (7.3.1.5).
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪ‬6-1-6-7
7.6.1.6 Tie-Rods and tread reinforcement
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6-4-7 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
Tie-rods and tread reinforcement shall comply
with 7.4.6.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻋﻘﺐ‬7-1-6-7
7.6.1.7 Back hanging board
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬120 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي و‬6 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي درﺟﻪ‬50 ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺳﺮﺷﻴﺎردار‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮك از دو ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ‬
A back hanging board, 120 mm minimum wide
and of no less thickness than the back stile, shall
be secured to each front stile by at least one 6
mm bolt and at least one countersunk wood
screw, not less than 50 mm long and of no. 10
36
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
gage. The width of the hanging board may be
made from two pieces, glued with the adhesive
specified in BS EN 301
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه و‬BS EN 301 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬8-1-6-7
7.6.1.8 Top
The front stiles shall be housed 5 mm to 6 mm
full section into a top which shall be secured to
each stile and the back hanging board by glue
and either nails or screws.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي را‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬5 ‫ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮش داده ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫در ﻣﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎي دﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﺦ و ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‬،‫و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ‬
The top shall not be less than 125 mm × 28 mm
thick and shall be either a single piece or two
pieces glued with the adhesive specified in BS
EN 301
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬125×28 ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬BS EN 301 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬9-1-6-7
7.6.1.9 Back
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﺑﻌﺎدي اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ‬7 ‫ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
:‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ زاوﻳﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The back shall consist of stiles of the minimum
dimension specified in table 7. The length of the
back stiles shall be such that when the steps are
fully opened the front stiles are inclined at an
angle to the horizontal of:
a) for heights up to and including 1375 mm:
not less than 65° and not more than 70°;
70 ‫ و‬65 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬1375 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺮاي ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﺎ و‬
b) for heights over 1375 mm : not less than
65° and not more than 75°.
75 ‫ و‬65 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬1375 ‫ب ( ﺑﺮاي ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
At the same time the back shall be inclined at an
angle to the horizontal of not less than 72° and
not more than 80°.
‫ درﺟﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬80 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬72 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ اي ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻓﻖ ﺷﻴﺐ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The distance between the back stiles shall vary
in the same proportion as the front stiles.
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺮده ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬10-1-6-7
7.6.1.10 Top raill
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬69 ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﻧﺮده ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
:‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻜﻲ از دو ﻣﻮرد زﻳﺮ‬.‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
A top rail, not less than 69 mm wide and of the
same thickness as the back stiles, shall be either:
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺎق و زﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
10± 1 ‫ ﮔﻮه دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ و زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑــﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ روﻳﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و‬6 ‫ب ( ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي دواﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮض‬
‫در زاوﻳﻪاي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺮده ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻨﺪرج‬
‫ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه‬BS EN 301 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫در ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي‬38 ‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ دو ﭘﻴﭻ‬،‫و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻳﻚ درﻣﻴﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮرب ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬10 ‫درﺟﻪ‬
a) Through tenoned into the back stiles and
double wedged with tenons of 10 ±1 mm;
or
b) lapped at both ends to a depth of 6 mm
and at an angle suitable for a snug fit
over the back stiles to which the top rail
is secured by gluing with the adhesive
specified in BS EN 301 and, after
assembly, by screwing with two 38 mm
no. 10 gage C/sunk head steel screws
staggered diagonally.
‫ ﻧﺮدهﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‬11-1-6-7
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻳﻚ‬2/28 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺸﺎن ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
3800 ‫ﻧﺮده ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و اﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از اﻳﻦ اﻧﺪازه اﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
7.6.1.11 Lower rails
Steps not exceeding 2.28 m long shall have one
lower rail: steps over 2280 mm but not over
37
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
3800 mm shall have two lower rails. The bottom
rail shall be so positioned that its center line
shall not be less than 250 mm and not more than
500 mm from the ends of the stiles. Lower rails
shall not be less than 69 mm wide, of the same
thickness as the back stiles and shall be either:
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻧﺮده ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺎن‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ دو ﻧﺮده ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬250 ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ آن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻋﺮض‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬500
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬69 ‫ﻧﺮدهﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
:‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از دو ﻣﻮرد زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) Lapped at both ends to a depth of 6 mm,
each joint being secured by gluing with
adhesive specified in BS EN 301 part 1, 2
and screwing with two 38 mm no. 10 gage
screws staggered diagonally; or
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي روﻳﻬﻢ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و‬6 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي دواﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬
b) Through tenoned into back stiles, double
wedged and glued, having tenons of 10
mm +1 mm thick.
‫ب ( ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺎق و زﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﺪرج در‬.‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه‬BS EN 301 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن و‬38 ‫و ﺑﺎ دو ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻣﻮرب ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد؛ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ دو ﮔَﻮِّه و ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود و‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬١ + ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬10 ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ زﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬
7.6.1.12 Hinges
‫ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬12-1-6-7
The back shall be hinged to the back hanging
board by two mild steel back flaps or strap
hinges having not less than 50 mm length of
joint for steps up to 2.5 m long, and not less
than 63 mm length of joint for steps over 2.5 m
long. Each hinge flap shall be secured with one
bolt or rivet and at least two steel countersunk
headed screws not less than 19 mm long. The
end of the bolt shall be riveted over the nut
unless self locking nuts are used. The bolt
securing the top flap may be the same bolt
referred to in (7.6.1.7).
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮي‬2/5 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي‬50 ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻻي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻮﻻي ﺗﺨﺖ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬
63 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻟﻮﻻي‬2/5 ‫ و ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬،‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻟﻮﻻي ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮچ و‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬19 ‫دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ دو ﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﺮﺷﻴﺎردار‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﻤﺎن‬،‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﭘﺮچ و ﻳﺎ از ﻣﻬﺮهﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻨﺪرج اﺳﺖ‬7-1-6-7 ‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬13-1-6-7
7.6.1.13 Cords
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دورﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬BS 6125 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬6
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬.‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮر از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬9-1-6-7 ‫در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺮه زده ﺷﺪه‬
.‫و ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The steps shall be fitted with two plaited or
braided cords of equal length not less than 6 mm
diameter, in accordance with BS 6125, or
material of equivalent strength. The length of
the cords shall be such that when fully extended
the front and back stiles are at the angles
specified in 7.6.1.9. Cords shall be fixed by
passing them through the sides of the front and
back stiles or lower back rail and shall be either
knotted at both ends or knotted at one end and
stapled at the other.
(‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬7-7
7.7 Backed Steps (Aluminum)
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬1-7-7
7.7.1 Construction
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن آﻟﻮﻣﻴـﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬1-1-7-7
7.7.1.1 The construction of aluminum ladder
backed steps shall be as specified in (7.5.1.1),
(7.5.1.2) and (7.5.1.4) to (7.5.1.9) together with
(7.7.1.2) and (7.7.1.3).
‫ ﺗﺎ‬4-1-5-7 ‫ و‬2-1-5-7 ،1-1-5-7 ‫ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪﻫـﺎي‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬، 3-1-7-7 ‫ و‬2-1-7-7 ‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬9-1-5-7
38
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬2-1-7-7
7.7.1.2 Back
The back shall be constructed of stiles and rungs
and shall comply with clause (7.1). In addition,
the rungs shall be spaced so that the top of the
rungs and treads are at the same level when the
steps are open.
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و ﭘﻠﻪﻫــﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬1-7
.‫ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮاز ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
The hinge device joining the back to the front
shall be of a type that will limit the extent of
opening.
‫ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﺑﻬﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﺎري ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬3-1-7-7
7.7.1.3 Working height
The maximum working height provided for a
scaffold board shall be 1785 mm above floor
level.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎري‬1785 ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
7.8 Wood Type Backed Steps Class 1
(1 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار )ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬8-7
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-8-7
7.8.1 General
‫ و ﺑﻨﺪﻫــﺎي‬2-6 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
.‫ و ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8-1-6-7 ،5-1-6-7 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬2-1-6-7
Wood type ladder backed steps shall comply
with the appropriate requirements of section 6.2
and paragraphs (7.6.1.2) to (7.6.1.5), (7.6.1.8)
and the following clauses.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‬2-8-7
7.8.2 Back hanging board
28 ‫ و ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬66 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﭼﻮب‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬50 ‫ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪدار ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
A back hanging board, not less than 66 mm
deep and 28 mm thick, shall be secured to each
front stile, and immediately beneath the top, by
one countersunk wood screw not less than 50
mm long, and one nail.
‫ ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ‬3-8-7
7.8.3 Back
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬.‫ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ و ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻮب ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪور‬.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬3 ‫ﺷﺪه در ﺟﺪول‬
‫ آﻣﺪه‬3-1-2-7 ‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس آﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازهاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ ﮔﺮدد و‬9-1-6-7 ‫ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫ روي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
The back shall be constructed of stiles and
rungs. The stiles shall consist of wrought
rectangular timber and shall be of the
dimensions specified in table 3. The rungs shall
be either rectangular or circular as specified for
standing ladders in (7.2.1.3).
The length of the back stiles shall be such that
when the steps are fully opened the front and
back stiles are inclined at the appropriate angles
as specified in (7.6.1.9) and that when the steps
are fully closed and used as a shelf ladder they
shall stand on the front stile.
‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ‬
،‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The width between the back stiles shall be the
same as between the front stiles or they may be
parallel with the width determined at the top.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬4-8-7
7.8.4 Spacing of rungs
‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ در ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬
،‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ دو ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ از ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
The rungs in the back stiles shall be so spaced
that when the steps are fully opened the top
39
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
surfaces of the rungs are level with the top
surfaces of the treads in the front stiles.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي دوﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮاز ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬5-8-7
7.8.5 Tie-Rods and rung reinforcement
‫در ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ در زﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮآﻣﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و‬.‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ واﺷﺮﻫﺎ روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎف‬
‫و ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
The back shall be provided with tie-rods or
reinforcing wires fitted adjacent to and
underneath the center of each rung. Any
projection of the tie-rods, reinforcing wires or
washers above the surfaces of the stiles shall be
smoothed off to prevent injury to the hands of
the user.
‫ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬6-8-7
7.8.6 Hinges
‫ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ دوﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎﻳﻲ از‬
‫ ﭼﺪن ﻧﺮم ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ آﻫﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻد‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺪود‬،‫ آﻣﺪه‬9-1-6-7 ‫ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬9 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻃﻮل ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
The front and the back of the steps shall be
connected by means of shouldered or lipped
trestle hinges of steel, wrought iron or malleable
cast iron which limit the extent of opening of
that specified in (7.6.1.9). The minimum length
of hinges shall be as given in table 9.
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭘﺸﺖﮔﻴﺮ‬7-8-7
7.8.7 Check blocks
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﻃﺮف ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻛﺸﺶ روي ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭘﺸﺖﮔﻴﺮ‬،‫ﭘﻠﻪدار ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﻮح داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﺮﻛﺪام ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را‬،‫ﻣﻬﺮ و ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﭻ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺑﻬﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ دوﭘﻴﭻ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﻲ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮد‬
To relieve the hinges of strain when ladder
backed steps are being moved in the closed
position, check blocks shall be fitted to the
inside faces of both front stiles, each secured by
one bolt and one countersunk wood screw, or
they may be glued and fixed by two countersunk
wood screws.
(‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دوﻟﻨﮕﻪاي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ )آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬9-7
7.9 Folding Trestles (Aluminum)
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬1-9-7
7.9.1 Construction
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬،‫اﻧﺪازه ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3/1 ‫ و‬2/5 ‫ و‬1/9 ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬،‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
Preferred heights of folding trestles, measured
on the closed stiles, are 1.9m, 2.5 m and 3.1 m.
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬1-1-9-7
7.9.1.1 Stiles
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ دوﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻃﻮل‬
‫ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ و ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮده ﺗﺎ ﻣﻬﺎر اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺨﺸﻲ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫و ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﻗﺎدر ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
‫ ﻋﺮض داﺧﻠﻲ در ﻧﻮك اﻳﻦ‬.‫را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ك( ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
30 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻮده و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬500 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬300 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ‬
.‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
The stiles of both halves shall be of equal length
and shall be adequate to provide secure
anchorage and enable the cross-bearers to
support the test load specified in Appendix K.
The inside width at the top of the trestle shall
not be less than 500 mm and shall be increased
by not less than 30 mm in each 300 mm of
length of the stiles.
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ‬2-1-9-7
7.9.1.2 Feet
‫ ﻣﻬﺎر ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ‬،‫در ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻛﻒ آﻧﻬﺎ از ﭼﻮب ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ اﻣﺎ‬.‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺠﺪد ﺑﺘﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ‬
The four feet of the trestles shall all be on the
same plane when the trestles are in the open
position and shall be soled with hardwood,
plastics or rubber. The soling material shall be
securely fixed but easily removable for renewal.
40
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫‪ 3-1-9-7‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﺎرهﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫‪7.9.1.3 Side plates‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Side plates shall be fitted to keep the stiles in‬‬
‫‪register when the trestle is closed.‬‬
‫‪ 4-1-9-7‬ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪7.9.1.4 The hinges shall be of:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ( آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﭘﺘﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ رﻳﺨﺘﻪﮔﺮي ﺷﺪه؛ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪a) Cast or forged aluminum; or‬‬
‫ب( ﻓﻮﻻد ﭘﺘﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮار ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع ‪ CR4‬از‬
‫‪b) Forged steel or steel strip complying with‬‬
‫‪type CR4 of BS 1449‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ :BS 1449‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد‬
‫دوﺗﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ‪ 30‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬درﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﺪود‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪They shall be trestle hinges of the locking type‬‬
‫‪and shall limit opening to a contained angle of‬‬
‫‪not less than 30° and not more than 40°.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدآوري‪:‬‬
‫‪Note:‬‬
‫ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﻛﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎر روي ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ropes or locking bars or similar devices as used‬‬
‫‪for swing back steps or platform steps may be‬‬
‫‪fitted to reduce concentration of load on hinges.‬‬
‫‪ 5-1-9-7‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫‪7.9.1.5 Cross-bearers‬‬
‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 610‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎوب در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ در ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎن روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪاي‬
‫از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Cross-Bearers shall be spaced not more than‬‬
‫‪610 mm apart and shall be staggered alternately‬‬
‫‪on each half of the trestle at half of this distance‬‬
‫‪except that there shall be a top cross-bearer at‬‬
‫‪the same level on each half.‬‬
‫‪ 10-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ )ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪(1‬‬
‫))‪7.10 Wood Type Folding Trestles (Class (1‬‬
‫‪ 1-10-7‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻛﻼس ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪7.10.1 Wood type folding trestles class 1 shall‬‬
‫‪comply with the requirements of section 6-2 and‬‬
‫‪the following clauses.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 6‬و ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1-1-10-7‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪7.10.1.1 Stiles‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺟﺪول ‪8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The finished sizes of stiles shall be not less than‬‬
‫‪those given in Table 8.‬‬
‫‪TABLE 8 - DIMENSIONS OF STILES FOR CLASS 1‬‬
‫‪FOLDING TRESTLES‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول ‪ -8‬اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻼس ‪ 1‬ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
‫‪LENGTH OF STILES‬‬
‫‪MINIMUM CROSS SECTION‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪UP TO AND‬‬
‫‪INCLUDING‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪OVER‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫‪mm‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪69 × 31‬‬
‫‪3.0‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪69×35‬‬
‫‪4.6‬‬
‫‪3.0‬‬
‫‪ 2-1-10-7‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪7.10.1.2 Distance between stiles‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮح داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫‪The width between the inner surfaces of the‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
stiles shall be not less than 500 mm at the level
of the top cross-bearer and shall be increased by
not less than 50 mm for each 500 mm length of
stile. The taper of the two halves of the trestle
shall be identical.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
500 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ‬500 ‫ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬50 ،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3-1-10-7
7.10.1.3 Cross-bearers
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬69×28 ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ و ﻋﺮض ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬16 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬15 ‫زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ه‬‫ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﮔَﻮ‬.‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ زﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ و ﻓﺎقﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در‬.‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬BS EN 301 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
The cross-bearers shall consist of timber not less
than 69 mm × 28 mm. The tenons shall be 15
mm to 16 mm thick and the full width of the
cross-bearer; the tenons shall pass through the
stile and be double wedged. The tenons and/or
the mortises shall be glued with the adhesive
specified in BS EN 301
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬4-1-10-7
7.10.1.4 Spacing of cross-bearers
The top of the top cross-bearer on each half of
the trestle shall be not less than 110 mm from
the top of the stiles. The other cross-bearers
shall be spaced so that those on one half of the
trestle lie midway between those on the other
half of the trestle. Except for the spacing of the
top two cross-bearers on one half, the spacing of
the cross-bearers on each half of the trestle shall
be 500 mm to 610 mm.
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﻧﻮك ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬110 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ آﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ وﺳﻂ آﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻧﻴﻤﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮار‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دو ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ روي ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬.‫دارﻧﺪ‬
500 ‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬610 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
Where uniform spacing as specified would bring
the bottom cross-bearer less than half of the
bearing spacing from the bottom of the stiles,
the bottom cross-bearer shall be positioned on
the same level as the lowest cross-bearer of the
other half of the trestle.
،‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬،‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﻳﻜﺴﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﻮد آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ در ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﻧﺼﻒ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬
‫ﺑﺎردﻫﻲ از ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
.‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬5-1-10-7
7.10.1.5 Contained angle between halves
The combined angle between the halves of the
trestle when fully open shall not be less than 24°
or more than 36°.
،‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬،‫زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬36 ‫ درﺟﻪ و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬24 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
7.10.1.6 Tie-rods
Tie-Rods shall comply with (6.2.4.1) and shall
be provided at a frequency of at least two on
each half of trestles with stiles under 3.0 m long,
and three on each half of trestles with stile
length over 3.0 m. The tie-rods shall be fitted
immediately below the second cross-bearer
from the top and either under the bottom crossbearer or under the second crossbearer from the
bottom. When fitted, the third tie-rod shall be
fitted under the cross-bearer nearest to the
center of the length of the stile.
‫ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ‬6-1-10-7
‫ در ﻫﺮ ﻟﻨﮕﻪ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬1-4-2-6 ‫ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
،‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دو ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺮاي دوﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬3 ،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ و زﻳﺮ دوﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ از‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ دوﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻي ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪاي‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ‬7-1-10-7
7.10.1.7 Hinges
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻻي دوﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪ‬،‫ ﭼﺪن ﭼﻜﺶ ﺧﻮار‬،‫ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻻدي آﻫﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺷﺪه‬
The two halves of the trestle shall be connected
by means of shouldered or lipped trestle hinges
of steel, wrought iron or malleable cast iron
42
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
which limit the extent of opening to that
specified in (7.10.1.6). The minimum length of
the hinges shall be in accordance with Table 9.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛــﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬6-1-10-7
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬9 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻃﻮل ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
TABLE 9 - LENGTH OF HINGES FOR CLASS 1 FOLDING TRESTLES
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻳﻚ‬-9 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
STILE LENGTH
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
OVER
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
HINGE
LENGTH
No. OF
SCREWS
No. OF
BOLTS
‫ﻃﻮل ﻟﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﻬﺮه ﻫﺎ‬
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
m
m
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-1.8
2.5
3.3
1.8
2.5
3.3
4.6
200
250
300
375
‫ ﻣﻬﺎرﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬8-1-10-7
7.10.1.8 Check blocks
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن از‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ دوﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ دو ﻣﻬﺎرﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ ﻓﺸﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ وارد ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ دوﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺮﻟﻨﮕﻪ از‬
‫ ﻫﺮﻛﺪام ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻬﺮه و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دو ﭘﻴﭻ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
To relieve the hinges of strain when the trestles
are being moved in the closed position, check
blocks shall be fitted to the inside faces of both
stiles of one half of the trestle, each shall either
be secured by one bolt and one countersunk
wood screw, or shall be glued and fixed by two
countersunk wood screws.
‫ دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻧﻮع آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬11-7
7.11 Aluminum Type Lightweight Stagings
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-11-7
7.11.1 General
‫ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ل اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻧﻮك ﻳﺎ‬1/500 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
.‫ﻫﺮﻛﺪام ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix L the
residual deflection shall not exceed 1/500 of the
span or 3 mm, whichever is the greater.
The width of stagings shall be 450 mm
 5mm
.
 10mm
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬+5
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬450 ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬-10
Note:
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
This Standard does not specify the length of
lightweight staging, but the preferred lengths are
1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.2, 4.8, 5.4, 6.0, 6.6 and 7.3
m, each length with a tolerance of +0 mm, -50
mm.
‫ اﻣﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧـﺪارد ﻃﻮل دارﺑﺴﺖﻫــﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ را ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
،5/4 ،4/8 ،4/2 ،3/6 ،3 ،2/4 ،1/8 :‫ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎي ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬50 ‫ ﻫﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ رواداري ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬7/3‫ و‬6/6 ،6
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬2-11-7
7.11.2 Cross-Bearers
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ از‬.‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻳﺎ ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑــﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣــﺎت ﻣﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺑﻨــﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻮب اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
Cross-Bearers shall be of aluminum or timber;
where timber is used the cross-bearers shall
43
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
comply with the appropriate requirements of
(7.12.3).
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3-12-7
‫ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري‬3-11-7
7.11.3 Decking
50 ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد آن‬،‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬90 ‫وﻗﺘﻲ زﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي وزن‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﺎور ﻫـﻢ ﻗﺮار‬50 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در‬
‫ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻲ و اﻧﺤﺮاف داﺋﻤﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
When subjected to a mass of 90 kg applied to an
area 50 mm × 50 mm mid-way between two
adjacent bearers, the decking shall not fracture
and there shall be no permanent distortion.
The decking shall consist of either:
a) Aluminum or timber slats not less than 60
mm wide with a maximum gap between
the slats of 7 mm. The gap between the
slats and stiles shall not be more than 10
mm.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬60 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
b) Plywood of minimum thickness 9 mm
bonded with an adhesive complying with
type WBP of BS EN 301:
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬9 ‫ب( ﭼﻮب ﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬7 ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮده و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10
‫ ﺑﻬﻢ‬BS EN 301 ‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬WBP ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﻛﺸﻲ از ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﭼﻨﺪﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﻬﺖ‬.1 ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ‬.‫ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻮده و ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻃﻮل ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬90 ‫از اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
Part1. The face veneer of the plywood
shall run longitudinally with the staging.
Where plywood is scarf jointed to form a
continuous length, any such scarf shall be
at least 90 mm long.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺧﻮاه ﻓﻠﺰي ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬،‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
The top of the decking if metal or plastics shall
be textured to provide a slip resistant surface.
1 ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬،‫ دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺒﻚ‬12-7
7.12 Wood Type Lightweight Stagings Class 1
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-12-7
7.12.1 General
‫ و ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬2-6 ‫دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺑﺨﺶ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Lightweight staging shall comply with the
appropriate requirements of section 6.2 and the
following clauses.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
The stagings covered by this Standard are
intended to be capable of supporting three
workmen of average weight, reasonably spaced
apart, and their hand tools.
‫دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﮔﺮ را ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ از ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬3 ‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ وزن ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻛﺎرﺷﺎن را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ و ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫دارﻧﺪ‬
The load should not exceed 270 kg if distributed
over the length of the staging or 180 kg if
concentrated in the middlethird.
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬270 ‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ در ﻃﻮل دارﺑﺴﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮم ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬،‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬180 ‫ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ و اﮔﺮ‬
.‫دارﺑﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1-11-7 ‫ﻋﺮض و ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
The length and width shall comply with
paragraph (7.11.1).
7.12.2 Stiles
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬2-12-7
7.12.2.1 General
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-2-12-7
The stiles shall be planed on the outer face and
the two edges and may be fine sawn on the inner
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ و دو ﻟﺒﻪ و ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
44
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
face. The finished sizes shall be in accordance
with Table 10.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
10 ‫ اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول‬.‫ه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮاﻓﺖ ار‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
TABLE 10 - DIMENSIONS OF STILES FOR CLASS 1
LIGHTWEIGHT STAGINGS
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻬﺎرﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻳﻚ ﺳﺒﻚ وزن‬-10 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF STAGING (NOMINAL
OVER
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
UP TO AND
INCLUDING
MINIMUM CROSS SECTION
DIMENSION OF STILES
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
m
m
mm
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
-4.3
5.5
4.3
5.5
7.3
69 × 31
93×31
93×35
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬2-2-12-7
7.12.2.2 Jointed stiles
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬4/3 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي‬
. ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﻴﻢ و ﻧﻴﻢ اﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻨﺪ از )اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎ )ز( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Stiles for stagings 4.3 m and over may be scarf
jointed in which case they shall comply with (a)
to (g).
a) Where jointed stiles are used, the joint
shall be a scarf and shall have the slope
visible along the edges not steeper than 1
in 18, and there shall not be more than
one joint per stile. Test evidence shall be
available to show that at least 95%
efficiency in bending strength can be
obtained
from
the
joint
when
manufactured under normal production
conditions in the relevant wood species
(see Appendix C of BS 1129 for test
procedure).
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
b) Both portions of a jointed stile shall be of
the same species of timber, and shall
match, i.e. quarter sawn to quarter sawn
or flat sawn to flat sawn. Joints shall be
positioned so that they have no part
nearer to the center of the stile than 450
mm. Where both stiles are jointed, the
centers of the joints shall be separated by
at least one quarter of the stile length.
‫ب ( دو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
c) The moisture content of the pieces for
jointing shall not vary by more than 3%
from each other, and shall not exceed
17% moisture content.
‫ج ( ﻣﻴﺰان اﺧﺘﻼف رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮاي‬
d) The faces of the scarfs shall be cleanly cut
by fine set saw or planning, to give a flat
surface without tearing or crushing the
‫ه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎ ار‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪه و ﺷﻴﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ‬،‫ﻣﻲرود‬
‫ و ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬18 ‫ در‬1 ‫در ﻃﻮل ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ‬.‫ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ در اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم اﻧﺤﺮاف از اﺗﺼﺎل وﻗﺘﻲ‬95
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﺎدي از ﮔﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ وﺟﻮد دارد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج از‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.(‫ ﺑﺮاي روش آزﻣﻮن‬BS 1129 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻗﺮار‬.‫ﭼﻮب و ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از دو ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ دو ﺳﺘﻮن‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬450 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺎرم ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮن از ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪا ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻴﺰان رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬3 ‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎل‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬17 ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪه و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮاﺷﻲ ﮔﺮدد و ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺻﺎف‬
45
(‫د‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
fibers. The slope of the scarf shall run in
the general direction of any slope in the
grain. Care should be taken to keep the
cut surfaces clean to assist in this and
also to avoid distortion, joints should be
assembled as soon as possible on the
same day.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ﺑﺪون درز ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﭼﻮب اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
.‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﻫﺮ ﺷﻴﺐ رﮔﻪ ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪه‬.‫آﻳﺪ و از ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ زودﺗﺮ در ﻫﻤﺎن روز ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬WBP
e) The adhesive used shall be of type WBP in
accordance with BS EN 301. The method
used in mixing the adhesive shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, as shall the spreading, open
and assemble times, curing temperature,
cramping and conditioning times. Any
cramping arrangement shall be such that
the pressure is uniform over all the glue
line, so causing a continuous film of
adhesive. The pressure shall be as
specified in the adhesive manufacturer’s
written instructions, but in no case shall
be less than 0.69 N/mm2 and there shall
be a continuous squeeze out along the
full length of the glue line.
‫ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع‬
(‫ﻫ‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺑﻬﻢ زدن و‬،BS EN 301 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻛﺮدن ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ دﺳﺘﻮرات ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮر ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﭼﺴﺐ و ﻛﺸﻴﺪن آن روي‬
‫ ﺣﺮارت دادن ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬،‫ﺳﻄﻮح و زﻣﺎن ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪن‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺑﻬﻢ زدن و زﻣﺎن ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ﭼﺴﺐ‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﺮار دادن ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﭼﺴﺐ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮد ورﻗﻪ ﻧﺎزﻛﻲ از ﭼﺴﺐ در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‬
‫ وارد آوردن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪﻫﺎي‬.‫وﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬
0/69 ‫ وﻟﻲ در ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻮردي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬،‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ در ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺤﻞ ﭼﺴﺐ‬
.‫ ﭼﺴﺐ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون زده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
f) After release from the cramp and
subsequent
machining,
a
visual
inspection shall take place to ensure that
all glue lines are continuous, and that
there is perfect bonding of the fibers on
the faces where the joints appear.
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬،‫و( ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر و ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﻌﺪي‬
g) A sample joint shall be made in each
batch for testing to destruction, to ensure
that the glue mix for the batch is correct
(see Appendix D of BS 1129 for
procedure). Should the glue joint fail
under test and the timber remain intact,
the glue mix shall be regarded as
unsatisfactory and the batch rejected.
‫ز( ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ از ﻫﺮ ﺳﺮي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ و اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪي دﻗﻴﻖ از ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎ روي‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﻮب در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺒﻲ و ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از اﺧﺘﻼط درﺳﺖ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ د از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي روش( ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل در آزﻣﻮن‬BS 1129
‫ در‬.‫ﻣﺮدود ﻣﻲﺷﻮد و ﺧﻮد ﭼﻮب ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﭼﺴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﻧﺒﻮده و‬،‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺮدود ﺷﺪن‬
.‫آن ﺳﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3-12-7
7.12.3 Cross-bearers
‫ در ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮش ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ‬،‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﻮب‬
‫ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬22 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬31 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
22×22 ‫داراي ﻓﺎق و زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺦ در ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮش ﻋﺮﺿﻲ و‬25 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل اﺳﺖ‬22 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي ﻣﻮردي ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬381
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬381 ‫ﺑﻴﻦ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ و اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
The cross-bearers shall be of timber and of cross
section not less than 31 mm deep and not less
than 22 mm wide; they shall have tenons or pins
on each end not less than 22 mm × 22 mm or
not less than 25 mm diameter in cross section
and not less than 22 mm long. They shall be
spaced at centers not exceeding 381 mm except
in the case of the space between the end three
cross-bearers when a maximum space of 475
mm is permissible. The distance between the
center of the end cross-bearer and the end of the
46
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
stile shall not be more than 75 mm.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬75 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻛﻒ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري‬4-12-7
7.12.4 Decking
‫دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻛﻒ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻮاد و روﺷﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The decking staging shall be constructed using
one of the following materials and methods.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و‬60 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
a) Wood slats having a width not less than
60 mm and not more than 150 mm and a
thickness not less than 12 mm. The
finish shall be either wrought or fine
sawn. The gaps between the slats shall
not exceed 10 mm and the gaps between
the slats and the stiles shall not exceed
15 mm.
12 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬150 ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﭼﻮب ﻛﺎر ﺷﻮد و‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
10 ‫ ﺷﻜﺎف ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬.‫ه ﮔﺮدد‬‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ار‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ و‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬15 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
‫دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻫﺮ ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دوﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﭼﻮب‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬8 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي درﺟﻪ‬32 ‫ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ دار ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬
‫ و ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ﭼﻮب ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺮم ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و درﺟﻪ‬25 ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬75 ‫دواﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﭘﻬﻦﺗﺮ از‬
‫ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻮزﻧﻬﺎي دوﺧﺖ و ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دو ﻣﻴﺦ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬16 swg ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل و‬32 ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ از‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري آﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬34 ‫ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮض‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﻮده و ﻓﻘﻂ داراي‬
.(4 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
Both ends fixing of each slat shall be by
two countersunk wood screws 32 mm
long and of no. 8 gage when fixing to
softwood cross-bearers and 25 mm and
of no. 8 gage when fixing to hardwood
cross-bearers. When fixing slats wider
than 75 mm then three screws at each
end are required. Fixing of all other
cross-bearers shall be by two nails,
staples, or wood screws not less than 32
mm long and 16 swg. No fixing shall
protrude above the surface of the slats.
Joined slats and decking are permitted
provided that each joint occurs over a
bearer not less than 34 mm wide and not
more than two joints occur on any one
cross-bearer (see Fig. 4).
1 ‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺑﺨﺶ‬WBP ‫ب( ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻮب ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع‬
b) Wood laminates bonded with a type
WBP adhesive in accordance with BS
1203: Part 1. The face veneer of
plywood shall run longitudinally with
the staging.
‫ روﻛﺶ ﭼﻮب‬.‫ ﺑﻬﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬BS 1203 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دارﺑﺴﺖ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﺑﺎ‬9 ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭼﻮب ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬380 ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫــﺎي ﻋﺮﺿـﻲ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬
‫ ﭼﻮب‬.‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬90 ‫ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺗﺎ‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻃﻮري ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮل ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪاي را‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬90 ‫ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮل ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ از ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري‬
:‫از ﺻﻮرتﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
The plywood shall be a minimum of 9 mm thick
and be capable of sustaining a load of 90 kg
when supported by the cross-bearers at 380 mm
spacing. The wood laminates may be scarf
jointed to form a continuous length; any such
scarf shall be 90 mm long. Joints required to
form a continuous length of decking shall be
either:
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ روي ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ و‬30‫( ﺑﺮشﻫﺎ‬I
I) 30 mm half lap located centrally over a
bearer fixed with at least 4 countersunk no. 8
screws 32 mm long through the laps into the
bearer; or
‫ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬8 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺷﻤﺎره‬32 ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ‬4 ‫ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
47
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﻪ در‬32 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬8 ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺧﺰﻳﻨﻪ دار ﺷﻤﺎره‬4 ‫( ﺑﺎ‬II
II) Butted and screwed with 4 countersunk
no. 8 screws 32 mm long as in Fig. 4(a).
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و‬،‫ )اﻟﻒ( آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬4 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬5-12-7
7.12.5 Tie-rods
ً‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﺎرﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً زﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات آن ﻳﺎ درون ﺷﻴﺎر زﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
A tie-rod shall be fitted immediately below,
immediately alongside, or into a groove
beneath, each cross-bearer.
‫ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬6-12-7
7.12.6 Stile reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be fitted in grooves
running centrally along the lower edge of the
stiles and shall be properly tensioned and
secured in position. Reinforcement may pass
over ends of stiles or pass through each stile 100
mm to 150 mm from the end of the stile.
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺷﻴﺎرﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً در ﻃﻮل ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬
.‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
100 ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از روي اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﻨﺪ‬150 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
Stiles for lengths up to and including 5.4 m shall
be reinforced with a 7 wire mild steel strand of
5.38 mm overall diameter having a minimum
characteristic strength of 425 N/mm2 or a single
wire, strip or different strand of equivalent
strength. Stiles for lengths over 5.4 m shall be
reinforced with a 7 wire mild steel strand of 6.4
mm overall diameter having a minimum
characteristic strength of 460 N/mm2 or a single
wire, strip or different strand of equivalent
strength.
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ از ﻓﻮﻻد‬7 ‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬5/4 ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺗﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬5/38 ‫ﻧﺮم ﺑﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﻮار ورق ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺑﻬﻢ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ‬/‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‬425
‫ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﻌﺎدل‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ از ﻓﻮﻻد‬7 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬5/4 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬6/4 ‫ﻧﺮم ﺑﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﻮار ورق ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ‬/‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‬460
.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
48
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
( ‫ )اﻟﻒ( ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬4-12-7 ‫ ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﺪه )ﺑﺮاي ﻃﻮل ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬- (‫)اﻟﻒ‬
(b) Halved and glued (nailed or stapled) (For length of nails see clause 6.2.4.5)
(5-4-2-6 ‫)ب( ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻬﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪه )ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪ( )ﺑﺮاي ﻃﻮل ﻣﻴﺦﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
Fig. 4- DECKING JOINTS FOR LIGHTWEIGHT STAGINGS
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮاي دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ‬-4 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬-8
8. PERFORMANCE TESTS
Performance tests described below are for
specific types of wood and aluminum ladders.
‫آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع ﺧﺎص‬
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ و ﭼﻮﺑﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
8.1 Performance Test for Aluminum Type of
Single-Section Standing and Extending Ladders
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬1-8
.‫اﻳﺴﺘﺎ و ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎر‬1-1-8
8.1.1 Deflection under load
‫ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
5 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از ﺣﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ از ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﻮرد‬1 ‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ و اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
.‫ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ داﺋﻤﻲ‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix B the
deflection of the loaded stiles shall not exceed
the limit determined from the graph shown in
Fig. 5. In addition, after removal of the test load
there shall be no permanent damage and the
residual deflection shall not exceed 1 mm per
meter of test span.
‫ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﺸﻲ‬2-1-8
8.1.2 Torsional rigidity
‫ ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه از ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6 ‫داده ﺷﺪه در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix B the
difference between the deflections of the two
stiles shall not exceed the limit determined from
the graph shown in Fig. 6.
49
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬3-1-8
8.1.3 Strength
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻫــﺮ ﻣﺘـﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﻦ‬1 ‫آزﻣﻮن اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix C,
after removal of the test load the residual
deflection shall not exceed 1 mm per meter of
length between the supports plus 1 mm.
‫ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬4-1-8
8.1.4 Twist
‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ د ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬11 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ داده ﺷﺪه در ﺟﺪول‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix D,
the angle of twist shall not exceed the value
given in table-11.
TABLE 11 - MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ANGLE OF TWIST
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز زاوﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬-11 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
ANGLE OF TWIST
DUTY RATING
TYPE
‫ﻧﺮخ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻧﻮع‬
Class 1
Industrial
‫درﺟﻪ‬
1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
18
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز زاوﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
Degrees (°)
‫ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن از ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬5-1-8
8.1.5 Sideways bending
‫ اﻧﺤﻨـﺎء‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣـﻮن ﺑـﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ﻫـ( ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه از ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﻮﺛﺮ )ﺑﻪ‬L ‫ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ‬،‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/0033L+18 ‫)ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( و اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix E,
the deflection measured midway between
supports shall not exceed (0.0033 L +18 mm),
where L is the effective span (in mm) and the
residual deflection shall not exceed 1 mm per
meter.
‫ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬6-1-8
8.1.6 Cantilever bending
‫ اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺳﺘﻮن‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )و( اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix F, the
residual deflection of either stile shall not
exceed 6 mm.
(‫ور‬‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ )ﻣﺪ‬7-1-8
8.1.7 Rungs
When tested in accordance with Appendix G the
rungs shall support the load. In addition, after
removal of the test load there shall be no
damage or permanent deflection.
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﻃﺒﻖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ز( اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ‬.‫را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺤﻨﺎء داﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬
8.2 Performance Test of Aluminum Type
Shelf Ladders
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻧﻮع‬2-8
8.2.1 The type of tests given in paragraphs
(8.1.1) to (8.1.6) shall be followed for aluminum
shelf ladders plus the treads test below.
(6-1-8) ‫( ﺗﺎ‬1-1-8) ‫ ﻧﻮع آزﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬1-2-8
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻄﺒﻖ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ آزﻣﻮن‬
.‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ دﻧﺒﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬2-2-8
8.2.2 Test for treads
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ح( اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix H the
tread shall support the load. In addition after
50
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
removal of the test load the residual deflection
of the tread shall not exceed 1 mm.
‫ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‬،‫ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
8.3 Performance Test of Aluminum Swing
Back Steps
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬3-8
‫ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬1-3-8
8.3.1 Rigidity
When tested in accordance with Appendix I.1,
the steps shall show no damage or permanent
deflection on removal of the load except that a
residual spread of up to 8 mm, measured
between the ends of the front and rear stiles, is
acceptable.
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ‬1-‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ط‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﺛﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬.‫اﻧﺤﻨﺎي داﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬8 ‫ﺷﺪن ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل اﺳﺖ‬،‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬2-3-8
8.3.2 Test for treads
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬2-‫وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ي‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن اﺛﺮ‬.‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز از‬
When tested in accordance with Appendix I.2,
the tread shall support the load. In addition,
upon removal of the test load the residual
deflection of the tread shall not exceed 1.0 mm.
51
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫اﻧﺤﻨﺎ )ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎر( ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪Effective span (m‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﻮﺛﺮ )ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪Fig. 5- MAXIMUM STILE DEFLECTION UNDER LOAD‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎر‬
‫‪52‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
Difference in deflection (mm)
(‫ﺗﻔﺎوت در اﻧﺤﻨﺎ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
Fig. 6- TORSIONAL RIGIDITY: MAXIMUM DIFFERENCE IN DEFLECTION BETWEEN STILES
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﺧﺘﻼف در اﻧﺤﻨﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬:‫ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﺸﻲ‬-6 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
53
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
8.3.3 Tests for deflection under load, strength,
sideways bending and cantilever bending shall
be as specified in (8.1.1), (8.1.3), (8.1.5) and
(8.1.6).
‫ ﺧﻤﺶ از‬،‫ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬،‫ آزﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺤﻨﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎر‬3-3-8
8.4 Performance Test of Aluminum Ladder
Backed Steps
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو‬4-8
8.4.1 Tests for rigidity, front and back are given
below:
‫ آزﻣﻮن اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻗﺎبﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در زﻳﺮ‬1-4-8
‫ﻛﻨﺎره ﻫﺎ و ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬
.‫( ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6-1-8) ‫( و‬5-1-8) ،(3-1-8) ،(1-1-8)
‫ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار‬
:‫آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫(؛‬1-3-8) ‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬
a) For rigidity, see clause (8.3.1);
‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑــﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻫــﺎي‬،‫ب( ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺎب ﺟﻠﻮﻳـﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
b) For front, see clauses (8.3.2) and (8.3.3);
‫(؛‬3-3-8) ‫( و‬2-3-8)
(1-1-8) ‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬،‫ج( ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺎب ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
c) For back, see clauses (8.1.1) to (8.1.3),
(8.1.5) and (8.1.6).
(6-1-8) ‫( و‬5-1-8) ،(3-1-8) ‫ﺗﺎ‬
8.5 Performance Test of Aluminum Type
Folding Trestles
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬5-8
8.5.1 Strength of cross-bearers, when tested in
accordance with Appendix J shall have no
permanent distortion and shall be as specified in
(8.1.1), (8.1.2), (8.1.3) (8.1.5) and (8.1.6).
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬،‫ اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬1-5-8
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ و‬.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ي( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ اﻧﺤﺮاف داﺋﻤﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،(2-1-8) ،(1-1-8) ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧــﻪ ﻛــﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪﻫــﺎي‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫( ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬6-1-8) ‫( و‬5-1-8) ،(3-1-8)
‫ رواداري در اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎ‬-9
9. TOLERANCES ON SIZES
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ‬1-9
9.1 The overall length of wood type ladders
shall be subjected to the following tolerances:
:‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪود و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬±50
± 50 mm for sections up to and including 3m;
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪود و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬3 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬±75
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬6
± 75 mm for sections over 3 m and up to and
including 6 m;
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬6 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬±100
± 100 mm for section over 6m;
± 5 mm for rung and tread centers on a single
product.
.‫ور در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻠﻪ و ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬±5
Where a size is specified as a nominal
dimension a tolerance of ±5% applies when
determining the acceptable actual size.
‫ رواداري ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺑﻌﺎد اﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬±5 ‫ﻣﻴﺰان‬
When checking the dimensional requirements of
ladders, any cut outs for joining members,
fitting guide brackets or similar purposes shall
be discounted.
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮش ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﺴﺮ‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻫﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
Where treads have a rectangular cross section
the dimensions specified in this standard are
overall dimensions (see Fig.16 (a)). The
dimensions of other shapes of tread shall be
measured as shown in Fig. 16 (b) and (c). The
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در‬،‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.((‫ )اﻟﻒ‬16 ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
(‫ )ب( و )ج‬16 ‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺷﻜﺎل ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
54
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
maximum loss of section due to sloping is
defined in Fig. 16.
.‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬16 ‫ﻟﻐﺰش ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
9.2 For aluminum types of ladder a tolerance of
25 mm shall be permitted on the nominal length
of all ladders.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬25 ‫ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬2-9
9.2.1 Spacing of rungs and treads shall not vary
by more than 2.0 mm from the nominal spacing
selected by the manufacturer.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در‬2 ‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬1-2-9
.‫در ﻃﻮل اﺳﻤﻲ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ اﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬاري‬-10
10. MARKINGS
Equipment shall be clearly and durably marked.
There shall be no reduction in legibility at the
conclusion of the test. Adhesive labels, where
used, shall not have worked loose or become
curled at the edges.
‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﻟﻮازم و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت واﺿﺢ و ﺑﺎ دوام ﺑﻮده‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ اﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ وﻗﺘﻲ از ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬.‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪاﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺨﻮرد‬
10.1 Ladders, steps, trestles and lightweight
stagings shall be marked with the following
particulars:
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫـﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬـﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑــﻪ ﺧﻮد و‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
1-10
‫دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻧﻮاع ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎت زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬
:‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺎري ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﻧﺎم‬.‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
- The name, trade mark or other means of
identification of the manufacturer or
supplier;
- The number and date of standard
followed for manufacturing this
product.
- The class and duty rating.
‫ﺷﻤﺎره و ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردي ﻛﻪ از آن ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﭘﻴﺮوي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
-
.‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ و درﺟﻪ ﻛﺎري‬
-
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
10.2 Ladders, steps and trestles shall be
provided with a separate lable displaying the
following wording on a background colored
blue for class 1, yellow for class 2 and red for
class 3.
2-10
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎي ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪاي ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎرات زﻳﺮ روي‬
‫ و ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮاي‬2 ‫ زرد ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬،1 ‫ﭘﺲ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ آﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
- Inspect for damage before use.
- Lean ladder at approximately 75° from
horizontal (1 m out for each 4m height).
- Ensure firm level base.
- Check safety at top.
- Avoid electrical hazards.
- Avoid over reaching. (Do not push or
pull, from the ladder or climb higher
than the third rung from the top).
- Keep a secure grip.
55
.‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
-
‫ درﺟﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ )ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ‬75 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺘﻜﻲ در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
.(‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬4 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ‬
-
.‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺗﺮاز ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
-
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
-
.‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺧﻄﺮات ﺑﺮق‬
-
‫از دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﺷﻮد )ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ از ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺻﻌﻮد‬
.(‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن را ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
-
-
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
- Never stand on top of swing back steps
or step ladders.
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ در ﻧﻮك ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻃﺮف ﭘﻠﻪ دار ﻧﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
-
- Secure at top and bottom wherever
possible.
.‫ﺣﺼﻮل اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
-
‫ دارﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮن‬3-10
10.3 Lightweight stagings shall bear a label
fitted to the outside of one stile incorporating in
letters not less than 4 mm high with the
following wordings:
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬4 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ آﻣﻴﺨﺘﻦ و ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺮوﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪي‬
:‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫زﻳﺮ‬
"Maximum load, three men spaced apart and
hand tools or 270 kg uniformly distributed".
‫ ﻣﺮد ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ و اﺑﺰار دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬3 ،‫"ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
."‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد‬270
‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬-11
11. CARE AND USE OF LADDERS
‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬1-11
11.1 Handling
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺗﻜﺎن ﺧﻮردن و‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ‬،‫ ﻓﻮراً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﻫﺮ ﺻﺪﻣﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺨﻮرد‬
.‫از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺨﺺ ذﻳﺼﻼح رﻓﻊ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
Equipment should be handled with care and not
subjected to unnecessary dropping, jarring or
misuse. If it has fallen or received a heavy blow, it
should be examined immediately and any damage
should be eliminated and repaired by a competent
person before putting back into service.
‫ اﻧﺒﺎرﻛﺮدن‬2-11
11.2 Storage
Equipment should be stored in such a manner as
to provide ease of access and inspection and to
prevent danger of accident when withdrawing
for use.
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي اﻧﺒﺎر و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺎرج‬
‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ آﺳﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و از ﺧﻄﺮ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
Ladders should be stored horizontally on racks
designed for their protection when not in use.
These racks should have supporting points at
every 2 m to prevent any possibility of
excessive sagging. At no time should any
material be placed on the ladder whilst in store.
Timber plant should be stored in a location
where it will not be exposed to the elements but
where there is good ventilation; it should not be
stored near radiators, stoves, steam pipes or
other places subject to excessive heat or
dampness.
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاﻳﺸﺎن ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
2 ‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﻧﻘﺎط‬،‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ از اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮادي را روي‬.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ را‬.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﻧﺒﺎر ﺷﺪه ﮔﺬاﺷﺖ‬
‫در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ و داراي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺨﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬،‫ اﺟﺎق ﮔﺎز‬،‫ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ‬،‫ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ اﻧﺒﺎر ﻧﺸﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻜﺎنﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت زﻳﺎد ﻳﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬3-11
11.3 Transport
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ روي وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ و‬،‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮي از ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪر ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آورد‬
‫ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ‬،‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮآﻣﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي و ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﺎﻳﺶ و ﺗﻜﺎنﻫﺎي ﺟﺎدهاي‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺑﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬.‫ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎنﻫﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮاش و ﺳﺎﻳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Ladders carried on vehicles should be
adequately supported to avoid sagging and there
should be minimum overhang beyond
supporting points, which should be of resilient
material. Ladders should be tied to each support
point to minimize rubbing and the effects of
road shock. Other plant should be carefully
loaded so that the ladder will not be subject to
shock or abrasion.
‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬4-11
11.4 Maintenance
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮب در ﺗﻤﺎم اوﻗﺎت ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Equipment should be maintained in good
56
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
condition at all times. Hardware, fittings and
accessories should be checked frequently to
ensure that they are securely attached and in
proper working condition. Moving parts, such
as pulleys, locks, hinges and wheels, should
operate freely without binding or undue play
and should be oiled frequently and kept in good
working order. All bolts and rivets should be in
place and tight before use. Ropes or cables
should be inspected frequently and those frayed
or badly worn or defective should be replaced.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ﺳﺨﺖ اﺑﺰار‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ اﺳﺖ و در‬
،‫ ﻗﻔﻞ‬،‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬.‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮب ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪون ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﺪن و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آزاد ﺑﻲ‬،‫ﻟﻮﻻ و ﭼﺮخ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزاداﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و اﻏﻠﺐ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ و در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮب‬،‫ﻣﻮرد‬
،‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬،‫ ﭘﺮچﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻬﺮهﻫﺎ‬.‫ﻛﺎري ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮرد‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻃﻨﺎبﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ و آﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬
.‫زﻳﺎد و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮاﻗﺺ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬5-11
11.5 Inspection
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ و ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺨﺺ آﻣﻮزش‬
‫ اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫دﻳﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐدار و ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري و از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ‬،‫ور‬‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻴﺐ و‬،‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ و ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ و ﻧﻴﺰ رﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺮورﻓﺘﮕﻲ در اﺛﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
،‫ ﭼﺮخﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻬﺎ و ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ و ﺗﻤﺎم اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬،‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﭻ و ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ را در ﺑﺮ ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ ﭘﺮچﻫﺎ‬،‫ راﺑﻂﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮهﻫﺎ‬
Equipment should be inspected before and after
use and periodically by a competent trained
person. Those items found to be defective
should be suitably labeled or marked, and
should be withdrawn from service. The
inspection should include checking the rungs,
treads, cross-bars and stiles for damage, defects
and dents, checking the rung to stile
connections, checking ropes and cables and all
fittings, locks, wheels, pulleys, connections,
rivets, screws and hinges.
‫ رﻧﮓآﻣﻴﺰي‬6-11
11.6 Painting
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﺟﺎﺳﺎزيﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﻻك ﺷﻔﺎف ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻻك اﻟﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻼ‬
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﺷﻔﺎف ﻳﺎ ﻛﺪر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺷﻔﺎف ﻏﻴﺮ رﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻓﺴﺎد اﺟﺰاء ﭼﻮﺑﻲ و‬.‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬.‫در وﺳﺎﻳﻞ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎوي ﻧﻤﻜﻬﺎي ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
Timber equipment other than inserts may be
coated with a transparent non-conductive finish
such as varnish, shellac or a clear preservative,
but should not be coated with any opaque
covering. Preservatives for the treatment of
timber components in aluminum plant should
not contain copper salts. Aluminum should not
be used in corrosive conditions.
‫ ﺧﻄﺮات ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬7-11
11.7 Electrical Hazards
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮات ﺑﺮﻗﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Aluminum ladders should not be used where
any electrical hazard exists.
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬8-11
11.8 Inspection
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The ladder should always be inspected carefully
before use.
‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬9-11
11.9 Angle of Ladder
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬.‫ درﺟﻪ از ﺳﻄﺢ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﺷﻮد‬75 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ از ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺎرم‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﻲرﺳﺪ‬
The ladder should be erected at an angle of 75°
from the horizontal, i.e. the distance of foot
from the vertical surface should be as near as
possible one-quarter of the height reached by
the top of the ladder.
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه‬10-11
11.10 Support
‫ و‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وري ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻤﻮاري ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮد‬
Equipment should be placed on a secure footing
57
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
on a firm level base. It should not be used on
ice, snow or slippery surfaces, unless suitable
means to prevent slipping are employed. It
should not be placed on boxes, barrels or other
unstable bases to obtain additional height.
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ ﺑﺮف ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻳﺦ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﺮدن‬.‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮي از ﻟﻐﺰش وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ آن را روي ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
.‫داد‬
‫ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬11-11
11.11 Fixing of the Ladder
،‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﻧﻘﻄﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ و داراي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
‫ اﮔﺮ‬.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪن ﻣﻴﺦ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻨﺎب ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
The point on which the top of a ladder rests
should be reasonably rigid and have ample
strength to support the applied load. The ladder
should be securely fixed to this point. If such a
fixing is impracticable the ladder should be
securely fixed at or near the lower end either by
staking or by roping.
‫ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ‬12-11
11.12 Overlap
‫در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ‬
:‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
On extension ladders there should be an overlap
of at least:
1½ rung spacings for ladders with closed
lengths up to 5 mm;
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ؛‬5 ‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ‬1/5
2½ rung spacings for ladders with closed
lengths over 5 m and up to 6 m;
5 ‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬2/5
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ؛‬6 ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
3½ rung spacings for ladders with closed
lengths over 6m.
6 ‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬3/5
.‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮده و ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ آورده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﭼﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن ﻣﺠﺪد ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬،‫ﺷﺪه‬
ً‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻫﺎديﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
.‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
The ladder should be raised and lowered by the
user at the base of the ladder so that it can be
seen that the locks are properly engaged. When
extension ladders have been used previously as
single ladders, care should be taken to ensure
that the re-assembly of the ladder is properly
carried out and that interlocking brackets and
guides are correctly engaged.
58
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
DETERMINATION OF SLOPE OF GRAIN
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﺷﻴﺐ رﮔﻪﻫﺎ‬
To ascertain the slop of grain in timber it is
necessary to study both faces and edges of the
member over the length disregarding any slight
local deviations. If any seasoning checks are
present, these will indicate the slop of grain, as
will resin ducts. Slope of grain can be
determined by means of a tool called a grain
detector which consists of a handle that swivels
on a cranked rod with a gramophone needle set
at a trailing angle at the tip of the rod, as shown
in Fig. 7. The needle is pressed into the wood
between 1 mm and 2 mm deep and the scribe is
pulled along with a steady action parallel to the
edge of the wood: the needle will deviate in the
direction of the grain. If there are any steps in
the groove produced by the needle this indicates
that the needle is climbing over the grain, it is
then essential that another scribe is made to
make sure the two grooves are parallel to each
other.
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻄﻮح اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻲ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮرب ﺑﻮدن رﮔﻪ در ﭼﻮب‬
‫ ﺿﺮوري‬،‫ ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ اﻧﺤﺮاﻓﺎت ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬،‫و ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي آن‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬،‫ اﮔﺮ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎي ﻓﺼﻠﻲ در رﮔﻪ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺖ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻮرب ﺑﻮدن رﮔﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻮرب ﺑﻮدن رﮔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت آوﻧﺪﻫﺎي رزﻳﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫را ﻣﻲﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺑﺰاري آﺷﻜﺎرﺳﺎز رﮔﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ از ﻳﻚ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ دﻳﮕﺮ آن ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮزن‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬7 ‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛــﻪ در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬،‫ﮔﺮاﻣﺎﻓـﻮن ﻧﺼﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻮزن را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭼﻮب ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫دو ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻟﺒﻪ ﭼﻮب ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺳﻮزن از ﻣﺴﻴﺮ رﮔﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮف ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫در ﺷﻴﺎر ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﺒﻮر ﺳﻮزن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮزن از‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻴﺎر‬.‫روي رﮔﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ دو ﺷﻴﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
The inclination of grain on a face is measured as
shown in Fig. 8 and Fig. 9 in which AB is the
line indicating grain direction, AC is a line
drawn parallel to the edge of the member, BC is
of length one unit (any convenient unit may be
used) and is at right angles to AC. Grain
inclination is expressed as ’one in x’ where x is
the length of AC measured in terms of BC.
9 ‫ و‬8 ‫اﻧﺤﺮاف رﮔﻪ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﻮب ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬AB ‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در آن ﺣﺮوف‬
‫ ﺧﻄﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻟﺒﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬AC ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ رﮔﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﺣﺮوف‬
‫ ﻫﻢ ﻃﻮل ﻳﻚ واﺣﺪ اﺳﺖ )ﻫﺮ واﺣﺪ‬BC .‫ﭼﻮب ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻣﻲﺗﻮان ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮد( و در زواﻳﺎي راﺳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬AC‫ " ﻃﻮل‬x ‫ در‬1" ‫ اﻧﺤﺮاف رﮔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬.‫ اﺳﺖ‬AC
.‫ ﺑﻴﺎن و اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬BC ‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ ﺧﻂ‬،‫ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮد‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ رﮔﻪ ﻣﻮرب روي دو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺠﺎور ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮرب روي دو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮدد و ﻣﺤﺪودهﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﻫﺮدو ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮرب ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬10 ‫ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
When sloping grain occurs on two adjacent
surfaces, the slope may be determined on both.
The acceptance limits of both slopes considered
together are shown in Fig. 10.
59
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
Fig. 7- SWIVEL-HANDLED SCRIBE FOR DETERMINATION OF SLOPE OF GRAIN IN WOOD
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي زاوﻳﻪ رﮔﻪ در ﭼﻮب‬-7 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
Fig. 8- USE OF SCRIBE
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از روش ﺣﻜﺎﻛﻲ‬-8 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
60
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
Fig. 9- MEASUREMENT OF SLOPE OF GRAIN
‫ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي رﮔﻪﻫﺎي ارﻳﺐ‬-9 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
61
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف رﮔﻪ روي ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺎرم ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ 1‬در ‪Y‬‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف رﮔﻪ ﭼﻮب روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺎف اره ﺷﺪه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 1‬در ‪X‬‬
‫‪Fig. 10- ACCEPTANCE LIMITS OF SLOPE OF GRAIN ON ADJACENT SURFACES‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -10‬ﻣﺤﺪودهﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺤﺮاف رﮔﻪﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ ﭼﻮب روي ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻣﺠﺎور‬
‫‪62‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX B
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
TEST FOR DEFLECTION OF LADDERS
AND STEP FRONTS
‫آزﻣﻮن اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
If this test is being applied to an extending
ladder, extend it fully to the appropriate overlap
specified in (7.1.1.8) before the test is
commenced.
‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در‬،‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻜﺎر رود‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز‬،‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از آﻏﺎز آزﻣﻮن‬،‫ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪه‬8-1-1-7 ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫و ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
With the climbing face uppermost, support the
ladder or steps horizontally under the stiles at
each end rung or tread, or in the case of steps,
where the hand or knee rail is an integral part of
the step front, under the bottom tread and at a
point 200 mm in from the hinge point. Measure
the clear span between the supports. This is
regarded as the effective span for the purpose of
this test. Apply a preload as given in table 12,
according to the class, to the centre point of both
stiles distributed over 50 mm for a duration of
30 s. Remove this load and establish datum.
Then apply a test load as given in table 12,
according to the class, to the center point of one
stile distributed over 50 mm. By any convenient
means measure the vertical deflection at the
center of the effective span of both stiles
between the unloaded condition and after a
period of not less than 30 s from the application
of the full test load.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﻓﻘﻲ ﺧﻮاﺑﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد و زﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻌﻮد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ور ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬‫ﭘﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه و دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﺳﻪ ﺿﻠﻌﻲ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﺰو‬
200 ‫ و در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬،‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻣﻲآﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻟﻮﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮن ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬،‫ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
12 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﻣﻮﺛﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻣﻲآﻳﺪ‬
50 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻫﺮدو ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ روي‬،‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﻛﻼس‬
‫ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﮔﺮدد‬30 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮن‬،‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻼس‬12
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ اﺑﺰار‬.‫ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﮔﺮدد‬50 ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ روي‬
‫ﺳﺎدهاي اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻋﻤﻮدي در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻛﻞ‬30 ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري و ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
.‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﮔﺮدد‬
TABLE 12 - LOADS FOR DEFLECTION TEST
‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن اﻧﺤﺮاف‬-12 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
DUTY RATING
PRELOAD
TEST LOAD
‫ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ اﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن‬
Class 1: industrial
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
kg
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
55
63
kg
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
75
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX C
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
STRENGTH TEST FOR LADDERS, STEP
FRONTS AND TRESTLE FRAMES
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎي‬،‫آزﻣﻮن اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
If this test is being applied to an extending
ladder, extend it fully to the appropriate overlap
specified in (7.1.1.8) before the test is
commenced.
‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در‬،‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز و‬،‫ آﻣﺪه ﭘﻴﺶ از آﻏﺎز آزﻣﻮن‬8-1-1-7 ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
With the climbing face uppermost, support the
ladder or steps horizontally under the stiles at
each end rung or tread, or in the case of steps,
where the hand or knee rail is an integral part of
the step front, under the bottom tread and at a
point 200 mm in from the hinge point. Apply a
preload, as given in table 13, according to the
class, vertically at the middle of the ladder,
distributed over a length of 50 mm for a
duration of 1 min., so that the stiles are loaded
equally. Remove this load and establish a datum
point. Then apply a test load, as given in table
13, according to the class, in the same way as
the preload for a duration of 1 min. Remove the
load. By any convenient means measure the
residual deflection at the datum point.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺧﻮاﺑﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد و زﻳﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻌﻮد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺪور و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ ﺟﺰو‬،‫دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه و دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﺳﻪ ﺿﻠﻌﻲ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻣﺤﻞ‬200 ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﺳﺖ و در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
13 ‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﻟﻮﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ روي ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮل‬،‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻼس ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻤﻮدي در وﺳﻂ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم و ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ‬1 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬50
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و‬.‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬.‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻼس‬13 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺑــﺎ ﻫﺮ اﺑﺰار ﺳــﺎدهاي اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
TABLE 13 - LOADS FOR STRENGTH TEST
‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬-13 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
DUTY RATING
PRELOAD
TEST LOAD
‫ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ اﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﻻزم ﺟﻬﺖ آزﻣﻮن‬
Class 1: industrial
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
kg
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
95
64
kg
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
130
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX D
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ د‬
LADDER TWIST TEST
‫آزﻣﻮن ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
The test unit shall consist of a ladder base
section of any length, supported over a 2 m test
span. Place the ladder in a flat horizontal
position and support it at each end, as shown in
Fig. 11. The distance between the pivot point
center and the plane of the centerline of the
rungs shall not be more than 50 mm. Apply a
preload torque of 6.5 kg m gently and then
remove. The residual angle of pivotal support
shall be noted as datum position to establish a
reference for angular deflection. Apply a test
torque of 13 kg m in the same direction as the
preload by either using a torque wrench or by
applying a test load at the end of the arm.
Measure the angle of twist from the datum
position. Apply a second load of the same
torque as the preload in the opposite direction
and then remove. The residual angle of pivotal
support shall be noted as datum position. Apply
a second test load in the opposite direction to
the first test load. Measure the angle of twist
from the second datum position.
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬2 ‫و روي ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
11 ‫ﻃﻮر اﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد و در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آن ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻣﺤﻮر و‬.‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬50 ‫ﺣﺪ وﺳﻂ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺮاز ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﮔﺮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬6/5 ‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺒﻨﺎي‬،‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ آزﻣﻮن‬.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺤﺮاف ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم در ﻣﺘﺮ در ﻫﻤﺎن ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ‬13 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
‫ ﺑﻜﺎر‬،‫ﺑﺎ آﭼﺎر ﮔﺸﺘﺎور و ﺑﺎ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺎزوي ﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬.‫ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬،‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ از ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬.‫رود‬
‫در ﻫﻤﺎن ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ در ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫ زاوﻳﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ دوﻣﻴﻦ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري در ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬.‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ زاوﻳﻪ‬.‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻪ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﺎب از دوﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﮔﺮدد‬
65
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺤﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻣﺤﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن‬
‫ﺟﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل آﭼﺎر‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
‫)اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود(‬
‫‪Fig. 11- ARRANGEMENT FOR TWIST TEST ON SINGLE OR EXTENSION LADDER‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -11‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ آزﻣﻮن ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪Note:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدآوري‪:‬‬
‫‪The test span is 2m, but any ladder section that‬‬
‫‪is at least 2 m in length may be tested.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪوده آزﻣﻮن ‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزﻣﻮن ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX E
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫـ‬
SIDEWAYS BENDING (SWAY) TEST FOR
LADDERS, STEP FRONTS AND TRESTLE
FRAMES
‫ ﻗﺎب ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ و‬،‫آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﺟﻮاﻧﺐ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
Place the ladder, step or trestle on its side with
the rungs or treads vertical. Measure each
section of the ladder individually, the bottom
stile being supported as for the strength test of
Appendix C under the end rungs (see Fig. 12),or
in the case of steps, where the hand or knee rail
is an integral part of the step front, under the
bottom tread and at a point 200 mm in from the
hinge point. Apply a preload of 15 kg for 1 min.
and then remove it to determine the datum for
measurement on the lower edge of the lower
stile. Apply a test load as given in table 14,
according to the class, at the center points of the
span of the stiles distributed over 50 mm. By
any convenient means measure the vertical
deflection at the datum point on the lower edge
of the ladder and then remove the test load.
After 1 min. measure the residual deflection at
the same point.
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪور و ﭘﻬﻦ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ ﻫﺮﻗﺴﻤﺖ از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬.‫ ﻗﺮاردﻫﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در زﻳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ اﺧﺮ ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ در‬.(12 ‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه و رﻳﻞ ﭘﺎ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﺰو ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن اﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ زﻳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻮﻻ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬200 ‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم و ﺳﭙﺲ‬15 ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
،‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﻛﻼس‬14 ‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬50 ‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ روي‬
‫ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻋﻤﻮدي‬،‫ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪاي ﺳﺎده‬.‫ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬،‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ روي ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺮده اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ در ﻫﻤﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف‬.‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه اﻧﺪازه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭼﺎرﭼﻮﺑﻬﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
67
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫‪TEST LOAD‬‬
‫‪PRELOAD‬‬
‫‪DUTY RATING‬‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرآﻳﻲ اﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ‪KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ‪KG‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪Class 1: industrial‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪ :1‬ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫‪Class 2: light trades‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪ :2‬ﺗﺠﺎري ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫‪Class 3: domestic‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪ :3‬ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن‬
‫)‪Fig. 12- ARRANGEMENT FOR SIDEWAYS BENDING (SWAY) TEST (SEE ALSO Fig. 5‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -12‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(5‬‬
‫‪Note:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدآوري‪:‬‬
‫‪The deflection is the difference between the‬‬
‫‪heights of the lower edge of the ladder side‬‬
‫‪when unloaded (solid line) and when loaded‬‬
‫‪(dotted line). L is the effective span (in mm).‬‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻂ( و وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﭼﻴﻦ(‪ L .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ )ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪68‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX F
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ و‬
CANTILEVER BENDING (HORN END
STRENGTH) TEST FOR LADDERS, STEP
FRONTS AND TRESTLE FRAMES
(‫آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد )اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دﻣﺎﻏﻪ‬
The test unit shall consist of a step front, trestle
frame, single ladder section or the base section
of an extension ladder. Any safety shoes or
spikes affixed to the section shall be removed
before the test is conducted. The test unit shall
be placed on edge with the rungs or treads in a
vertical plane. The lower stile shall be clamped
to a support and shall be unsupported from the
bottom end to the midpoint of the lowest rung or
tread. If the rung has a flat surface, that surface
shall be parallel to the end of the support (see
Fig. 13). Establish a datum point on the end of
the stile to which the test load is to be applied.
Apply a test load, as given in table 15,
according to the class, for a minimum period of
1 min. to the extreme bottom end of the upper
stile. Apply the load to a block resting on the
full width of the stile web and hold in place by a
clamp.
،‫واﺣﺪ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎرﭼﻮب ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ اي ﻳﺎ‬
‫ از ﻛﻔﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻔﺶ ﻣﻴﺦ دار ﻗﺒﻞ از‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ‬.‫آزﻣﻮن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺳﺘﻮن‬،‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدد و از‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ‬.‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آن ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪ ﭘﻬﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻣﻮازي ﮔﺮدد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ روي آن‬.(13 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در‬.‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻼس ﺑﻪ‬15 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
‫ﻣﺪت ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ روي اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن‬.‫ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭘﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
69
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮك‬
‫)ج( ﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻨﺎب‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻧﺪاز‬
‫)ج( ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
‫و ﺑﺎر ﻣﺮده وزﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Cantilever in test‬‬
‫)اﻟﻒ( آزﻣﻮن ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮك‬
‫)ج( ﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
‫)ج( ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
‫‪Cantilever out test‬‬
‫)ب( آزﻣﻮن ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎرج‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﻣﺮده )وزﻧﻪﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪Fig. 13- ARRANGEMENT FOR CANTILEVER BENDING (HORN END STRENGTH) TEST‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -13‬ﻧﺤﻮه آزﻣﻮن ﺧﻤﺶ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد )اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دﻣﺎﻏﻪ(‬
‫‪70‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
The block shall be 25 mm thick, 50 mm long
measured along the stile and of width equal to
the clear distance between flanges. Ensure that
the load is suspended so that it is acting through
the vertical neutral axis of the stile (see Fig.
13(a)). Remove the test load and after 1 min.
measure the residual deflection at the datum
point. Repeat the loading and measurement
procedure on the lower stile (see Fig. 13 (b)).
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي آن در‬50 ‫ ﻃﻮل‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬25 ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻠﻮك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫راﺳﺘﺎي ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد و ﻋﺮض آن ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر‬.‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎن از ﻣﺤﻮر ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ آوﻳﺰان اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ »اﻟﻒ«( ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬13 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري و روش اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه‬
.(«‫ »ب‬-13 ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
TABLE 15 - TEST LOADS FOR CANTILEVER BENDING
(HORN END STRENGTH) T EST
(‫ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻤﺶ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ آزاد )اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دﻣﺎﻏﻪ‬-15 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
DUTY RATING
TEST LOAD
‫درﺟﻪ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن‬
125 kg
Class 1: industrial
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
71
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX G
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ز‬
TEST FOR RUNGS
‫ور‬‫آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
Support the ladder at an angle of 75° from the
horizontal and with continuous support for both
stiles over a length equal to three rung spacings.
To the center rung of the three, apply a vertical
load as given in table 16, appropriate to the class
of the ladder, distributed over a length of 50 mm
for 1 min. as follows:
‫ درﺟﻪ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﺪام ﺑﺮاي‬75 ‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﺳﻄﺢ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫ور‬‫ ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬، ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در راﺳﺘﺎي ﻃﻮل‬
،‫ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن‬،‫ در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻠﻪ‬. ‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ روي ﻃﻮل‬16 ‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
:‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد‬50
‫ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬،‫ور‬‫اﻟﻒ( در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﺪ‬
a) At the centre of the rung; and then
.‫ب ( ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
b) Close to one end.
‫ور ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر اﻧﺤﻨﺎي داﺋﻤﻲ ﻳﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري را ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Remove the load and examine the rungs for
permanent deflection or visible damage.
TABLE 16 - TEST LOADS FOR RUNGS, TREADS AND PLATFORMS
‫ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻬﻦ و ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ‬، ‫ور‬‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺪ‬-16 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
DUTY RATING
TEST LOAD
‫درﺟﻪ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن‬
225 kg
Class 1: industrial
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
72
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX H
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ح‬
TEST FOR TREADS OF SHELF LADDERS
‫آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬
Place the shelf ladder in the normal working
position, supported so as to prevent movement
of the feet or deflection of the stiles. To a
typical tread apply a vertical load, as given in
table 16 over a length of 50 mm for 1 min. as
follows:
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ را در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻗﺮار داده و‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﻣﻬﺎر ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
50 ‫ در ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از‬، ‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ ﭘﻠﻪ‬.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در‬
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ذﻳﻞ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮد‬16 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
‫اﻟﻒ( در وﺳﻂ ﭘﻠﻪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
a) At the centre of the tread; and then
‫ب ( ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ‬
b) Close to one end.
‫ﺑﺎر آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و اﻧﺤﻨﺎء داﺋﻤﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Remove the load and examine the ladder for
permanent deflection or visible damage.
73
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX I
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ط‬
TESTS FOR STEPS
‫آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
1.1 Test for rigidity. Attach securely, by any
convenient means, a wheel (or roller) to the
outer side of one of the back stiles. The wheel
shall be of metal and have a diameter of 50 mm;
it shall be mounted so that it can rotate freely,
with its axis parallel to the treads, and raises the
foot of the stile by 10 mm (see Fig. 14)
‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮخ )ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﻄﻚ( ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ از‬.‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬1-1
Place the steps in the fully open position on a
smooth level surface and apply the appropriate
preload given in table 17 to the top tread but
one, adjacent to the stile on the same side as the
wheel. In the case of platform steps, apply the
preload to the tread immediately below the
platform.
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز در ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻤﻮار ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﺎور ﻫﻤﺎن ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬17 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
،‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﻜﻮﻳﻲ‬.‫ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎر ﮔﺬاري ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﭼﺮخ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻣﺬﻛﻮر ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻳﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬، ‫دارد‬
Maintain the load on the tread for 1 min., then
remove the preload and then apply the appropriate
test load given in table 17 using the same
procedure. After the 1 min. has elapsed remove the
test load and the wheel before inspecting the steps
for damage and deformation.
‫ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮔﺮدد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺬﻛﻮر‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن‬17 ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن و ﭼﺮخ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬، ‫ ﭘﺲ از ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬.‫روش اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ و ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬
Examine the steps for visible deformation or
damage.
.‫ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮي ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭼﺮخ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻠﺰ و‬.‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ و ﭼﻨﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬50 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮرش ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﺒﺐ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ‬
.(‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬14 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد )ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬10 ‫ﻃﻮل ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﺎ‬
TABLE 17 - TEST LOADS FOR STEPS AND TRESTLES
‫ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬-17 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
DUTY RATING
PRELOAD
TEST LOAD
‫درﺟﻪ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
‫ﺑﺎر آزﻣﻮن‬
95 kg
130 kg
Class 1: industrial
‫ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬:1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬،1-‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﻤﺎم آزﻣﻮن ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ ط‬.‫ آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‬2-1
1.2 Test for treads. After completing the test
given in I.1, apply to a typical tread a vertical
load as given in table 16 over a length of 50 mm
for 1 min. as follows:
‫ ﻣﻨﺪرج‬16 ‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬،‫ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ‬50 ‫ در ﻃﻮل‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
:‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
a) At the centre of the tread; and then
‫ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬،‫اﻟﻒ( در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
b) Close to one end.
.‫ب ( ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﻠﻪ‬
Remove the load and examine the ladder for
‫ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻇﺎﻫﺮي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
74
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
visible damage. Place a 6 mm thick straight
edge on the centerline of the tread climbing
surface so that it is symmetrically positioned
and covers 95% of the length of the tread and
the mid span point of the tread. Measure any
space between the latter point and the straight
edge.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻌﻮد‬6 ‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻃﻮل ﭘﻠﻪ را‬95 ‫ﭘﻠﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻘﺎرن ﺑﻮده و‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ از ﭘﻠﻪ و ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬.‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
1.3 Test for platform. After completing the tests
given in 1.2 apply to the center of the platform a
load as given in table 16 over an area of 50 mm
× 50 mm for 1 min.
‫ در‬2-1 ‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﻤﺎم آزﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺑﻨﺪ‬.‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺳﻜﻮ‬3-1
Apply a load of 54 kg uniformly distributed as
before. Take an initial reading for deflection
measurements at the mid span position on each
stile, (reading 1).
‫ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬،‫ ﺑــﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﺒﻞ‬،‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ‬54 ‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ و ﻣﻴﺰان اﻧﺤﺮاف در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ و‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.(1 ‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد )ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ‬
Increase the load to a total of 540 kg and
maintain it for 1 min.
.‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬540 ‫ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان‬
Reduce the load to 54 kg again and take a
further deflection reading as above, (reading 2).
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ و ﻗﺮاﺋﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ﻓﻮق از‬54 ‫دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ‬
.(2 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد )ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ‬
Calculate the residual deflection as reading 2
minus reading 1.
.‫ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮد‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺘﻔﺎوت ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
50×50 ‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد‬16 ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺟﺪول‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
75
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﭼﺮخ = ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪Fig. 14- METHOD OF FIXING WHEEL TO BOTTOM OF BACKLEG FOR STEP TEST‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -14‬روش ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﭼﺮخ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫‪76‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX J
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ي‬
TEST FOR TRESTLES
‫آزﻣﻮن ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دوﻟﻨﮕﻪاي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
Place the trestles in the fully opened position on
a level surface. Apply the appropriate preload
given in table 9 at the load center of the crossbearer and spread over a length of 50 mm.
Maintain the preload for 1 min. then remove it.
Apply a test load as given in table 9 in three
equal increments at the load center of the bearer,
the load being spread over a length of 50 mm.
Maintain the load for 1 min.
‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﻛﻪ دو ﻟﻨﮕﺔ آن از‬،‫روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻤﻮار‬
،‫ وﺳﻂ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬، 9 ‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول‬.‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
50 ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري از ﭘﻴﺶ اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﺬﻳﺮد و روي ﺳﻄﺢ آن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮔﺮدد و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‬9 ‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﻨﺪرج در ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺴﺎوي در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎر اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ و روي ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬1 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه و ﺑﺮاي‬50
Remove the load and examine the cross-bearers
and the whole trestle for permanent deflection
or visible damage. Repeat the procedure for
each cross-bearer.
‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ و ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺬﻛﻮر از ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء‬
‫ اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬.‫داﺋﻤﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد‬
77
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ك‬
‫‪APPENDIX K‬‬
‫آزﻣﻮن دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫‪TEST FOR LIGHTWEIGHT STAGINGS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮر اﻓﻘﻲ زﻳﺮ دو ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 150±5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻫﺮ‬
‫دو ﺳﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 400‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ روي‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪهﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫‪ 1‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬
‫‪With the decking uppermost, support the‬‬
‫‪lightweight staging, in a horizontal position,‬‬
‫‪under both stiles at 150 ±5 mm from each end.‬‬
‫‪Apply a preload of 400 kg uniformly distributed‬‬
‫‪over the area of the decking between the‬‬
‫‪supports and maintain the load for 1 min. before‬‬
‫‪removing the load.‬‬
‫‪ 54‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﻓﻮق‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎن ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي اﻧﺤﻨﺎء در ﻣﻴﺎن ﻣﺤﺪوده دوﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ‪.(1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺗﺎ ‪ 450‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ داده ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Increase the load to a total of 540 kg and‬‬
‫‪maintain it for 1 min.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺗﺎ ‪ 54‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم دوﺑﺎره ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داده ﺷﻮد و ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ دﻳﮕﺮي‬
‫از اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻮق ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ )ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ‪.(2‬‬
‫‪Reduce the load to 54 kg again and take a‬‬
‫‪further deflection reading as above, (reading 2).‬‬
‫اﺛﺮ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎي ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Calculate the residual deflection as reading 2‬‬
‫‪minus reading 1.‬‬
‫‪Apply a load of 54 kg uniformly distributed as‬‬
‫‪before. Take an initial reading for deflection‬‬
‫‪measurements at the mid span position on each‬‬
‫‪stile, (reading 1).‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
IPS-G-SF-355(1)
APPENDIX L
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ل‬
TEST FOR EXTENSION LADDER GUIDE
BRACKETS
‫آزﻣﻮن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ در ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
The sample to be tested shall take the form of a
length of stile to which a single guide bracket is
attached using the normal method of fixing.
Secure the stile by means of a clamping device
or devices so that it is fixed rigidly in position.
Apply the following load at the center of the
overhang of the bracket for 1 min. (see Fig. 15).
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از روش‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺮاي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪاي دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬،‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺮآﻣﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ‬
.(15 ‫ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬130 ‫ ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬1 ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
Class 1 extending ladders 130 kg
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﺑﺴﺖ و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻮدن آن در ﺟﺎي‬
.‫ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي و ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‬،‫ﺧﻮد‬
Measure and record any movement and
distortion of the bracket and its fixing and
whether any remains after removal of the load.
Fig. 15- APPLICATION OF LOAD IN TEST FOR EXTENSION BRACKETS
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺑﺎر ﮔﺬاري در آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬-15 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
79
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎاااا‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﮔﺮد ﺑﺎ زواﻳﺎي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫‪ a‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫‪ d‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫‪ g‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺷﻴﺎر روي ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻫﻴﭻ ﭘﻠﻪ اي ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎم اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﻮح ﺻﺎف ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Fig. 16-REQUIREMENTS FOR TREAD DIMENSIONS‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -16‬اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺑﺮاي اﺑﻌﺎد ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ م‬
‫‪APPENDIX M‬‬
‫اﻧﻮاع ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺧﺎص‬
‫‪SPECIFIC TYPES OF LADDERS‬‬
‫)‪(a‬‬
‫)اﻟﻒ(‬
‫‪EXTENSION LADDER‬‬
‫‪SINGLE-SECTION LADDER‬‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫‪SHELF LADDER‬‬
‫)‪(b‬‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫)ب(‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪(c‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ از ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫)ج(‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫‪BACK STEPS LADDERS‬‬
‫)‪(d‬‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ دار‬
‫)د(‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫آﺑﺎن ‪Nov. 2009 / 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-SF-355(1‬‬
‫‪FOLDING TRESTLES‬‬
‫)‪(e‬‬
‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن دو ﻟﻨﮕﻪ اي ﺗﺎﺷﻮ‬
‫)ﻫ(‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪84‬‬
Nov. 2009 / 1388 ‫آﺑﺎن‬
LIGHTWEIGHT STAGINGS
(f)
‫دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮدﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
( ‫)و‬
Fig. 17
17 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
85
IPS-G-SF-355(1)